X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
xv'
PRODUCED
BY
FIAT MOTORS OF NORTH AMERICA. INC.
PUBLICATIONS AND TECHNICAL TRAINING DEPT.
COPYRIGHT © 1982 by
FIAT MOTORS OF NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved — This book may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the ex-
press
permission
of
Fiat Motors of North
America, Inc.
The descriptions and illustrations appearing in
this book are not binding. Fiat reserves the
right to make at any time any changes or modi-
fications to the characteristics of the automobile without necessarily bringingvthis book up-
to-date.
Print No. 3399 (2/82)
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
FOREWORD
This manual has been written to provide basic information for the proper servicing of the
X1 /9 models.
The information is grouped in sections. Each section is identified by two—digit numbers.
Each section covers the service procedures for the individual groups and sub-groups. They
are identified by a number. The root of the number is taken from the general sub-group
code now being used for the Parts Catalogue and the Service Time Schedule. This number
identifies the service time schedule operation, parts catalogue sheet for the part covered by
the service procedure, and the service procedure.
HOW TO USE THE MANUAL
The information identification number consists of five digits, as follows:
a) The first two digits identify the section.
b) The third designates the group within the section and is used in conjunction with the
first two.
Cl The last two digits indicate an assembly or task consisting of several parts. This
number identifies the sub-group. It refers to the sub-group in both the Parts Catalog
and the Service Time Schedule.
Find the information required as follows:
1) Find the tab index page for the information on the first page of the manual.
2)
Find the group and subgroup for the information on the table of contents.
UPDATING TH E MANUAL
— Revision sheets are supplied together with a revised ”Composition of the Manual" sheet.
— Revision sheets can be of two types:
1) Replacement sheets: In this case the new sheet will carry the same page number as the
old one. A notation in the bind margin will read Supersedes page . . .dated . . ."
2) Complementary sheets on topics already dealt with: in this case the additional sheet
will carry the same sub-group number as the sheet on which the topic has been first
dealt with. The page number will be followed by a letter suffix.
Example: If additional information is needed for information on page 2, the new
sheet will be 2A.
BREE
X1/9
CONTENTS
Section
GENERAL INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE ................................. oo
ENGINE ......... _................................ 10
CLUTCH ......................................... 18
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE ........................................ 21 /27
BRAKES ............... . ........................ 33
STEERING SYSTEM ............................. 41
SUSPENSION AND WHEELS ................... 44
ACCESSORIES .................................. so
ELECTRICAL .................................... 55
BODY ........................................... 7o
SERVICE
MANUAL
1.|..||1.|1.|1|||
\I'l.
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
GENERAL INFORMATION MAINTENANCE - 00
Page
Identification Data ...................................
Tune-Up Specifications ...............................
00-3
00-4
Engine and Drive Train Specifications ..................
00-6
Chassis Specifications ................................
Electrical Specifications ..............................
Weights and Dimensions .............................
00-7
Capacities ...........................................
00-8
00-9
00-10
General Information
00
Page 00-1/2
00
General Information
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Chassis Type and Identification
Number - Punched on cowl on right
side of from luggage compartment
(above battery box).
Page 00-3
F.M.V. Safety Standard 115 Tag Type of vehicle and chassis number.
Located on left panel top between
instrument cluster and windshield.
.1'1' l/uAbD lIHl’S'”
Chassis Plate - Located on right side
of front luggage compartment.
. Jill...
=_|llI“
-_,
F.M.V.
E.P.A. Regulations Conformity
Tag - Air pollution control Specifica—
tions for correct engine tune-up and
adjustments. Located in engine compartment on left side.
Engine Type and Identification
Number - Punched on crankcase,
flywheel side.
Safety
Standard
Con-
formity Tag - Month and year of
manufacture. gross vehicle weight
rating, gross axle weight rating,
chassis number and vehicle type.
Located on left door jamb.
fllmllulu [Elfin—fl .
narr-
bl
.‘
Vehicle Emission Control Information Label - Located on left door
jambc
“CATALYST
F.M.V. Safety Standard 110 Tag Tire data and vehicle capacity.
Located on right door jamb.
‘
1:1,.I. ulfihl
l‘Jl-r'li .anluh
' ll I'm? er
In mnmrlmvtl lllr pinnrl
In my mag-am
‘-
Page 00-4
TUNE-UP SPECIFICATIONS (VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR)
Valve clearance (engine cold):
— Intake .........................................
— Exhaust .......................................
0.011 to 0.014 in. (0.28 to 0.35 mm)
0.015 to 0.018 in. (0.38 to 0.46 mm)
Fuel pump pressure at 4000 rpm ...............
3.5 to 4.3 psi
Spark plugs:
— Type ......................... AC
Bosch
.............................. Champion
..............................Marelli
——Gap
...............
Normal
42XLS
W175T30
N9Y
CW7LP
0.023t00.027in.
(0.6 to 0.7 mm)
Resistor
R42XLS
W175TR30
FINQY
CW7LPR
0.027t00.031in.
(0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Ignition timing ....................................
5° BTDC at 800 to 850 rpm
Distributor advance:
— Centrifugal ...................................
— Total (ignition timing and centrifugal) .........
23° to 27° at 5500 rpm
28° to 32° at 5500 rpm
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
16° to 18° at 12 in. Hg
26° to 30° at 12 in. Hg
—~ Vacuum
Idle Speed( 1) ......................................
800 to 900 rpm
C0 leveHat idle)(‘) ................................
1.0 to 2.0%
[‘l Idle speed and CO must be checked and adjusted with hose to reed valve or check valve pinched off.
General Information
00
Page 00-5
TUNE-UP SPECIFICATIONS (VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION)
Valve clearance (engine cold):
— Intake .........................................
— Exhaust .......................................
0.011 to 0.014 in. (0.28 to 0.35 mm)
0.015 to 0.018 in. (0.38 to 0.46 mm)
Fuel pump pressure ..............................
39 to 45 psi (2.7 to 3.2 bar)
Spark plugs:
— Type ..........................................
— Gap ...........................................
Champion RN9Y
0.027 to 0.031 in. (0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Ignition timing ....................................
10° BTDC at 800 to 850 rpm
Distributor advance:
— Centrifugal ...................................
— Total (ignition timing and centrifugal). . . . .
— Vacuum ......................................
16° to 20° at 3500 rpm
26° to 30° at 3500 rpm
12° to 16° at 11 in. Hg
Idle speed ........................................
800 to 900 rpm
CO level (at idle) ..................................
0.5 to 0.9%
Page 00-6
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Type:
— Vehicles with carburetor
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
Arrangement .....................................
Number of cylinders ..............................
Bore ..............................................
Stroke ............................................
Displacement ....................................
Valve arrangement ...............................
Compression ratio ................................
Horsepower rating, SAE net:
1 38AS .031
138AS.040
13888040
Mid transverse
Four
3.40 in. (86.4 mm)
2.52 in. (63.9 mm)
91.44 cu. in. (1498 cc)
Overhead valves. Single overhead
camshaft driven by toothed
timing belt.
8.5 to 1
— Vehicles with carburetor
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
66 at 5250 rpm
67 at 5250 rpm
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
Torque rating. SAE net:
— Vehicles with carburetor
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
75 at 5500 rpm
76 ft. lbs. at 2500 rpm
77 ft. lbs. at 2500 rpm
80 ft. lbs. at 3000 rpm
CLUTCH
Type ..............................................
Dry single plate, diaphragm spring,
hydraulically controlled, with no
pedal free travel.
TRANSMISSION
Gears ............................................
Gear ratios to 1:
— First ..........................................
—- Second .......................................
5 forward, 1 reverse
1979-80
1981 ~82
2.235
2.235
3.583
— Third ..........................................
1.454
— Fifth .......................................... ‘
0.863
— Fourth ........................................
— Reverse .......................................
1.042
3.714
3.583
1.461
1.033
0.863
3.714
DRIVING AXLE
Type ..............................................
Final drive ratio ...................................
Power drive to rear wheels. . . . . .'.. ...............
Combined with transmission.
Helical-toothed cylindrical gears.
13/53 (4.077 to 1)
By axle shafts connected to final drive
and to wheels through constant-velocity
ball joints.
00
General Information
Page 00-7
BRAKES
Type ..............................................
Disc brakes on all four wheels.
— Diameter .....................................
— Originalthickness ............................
—- Minimum thickness after refacing ............
8.937 in. (227 mm)
0.421 to 0.429 in. (10.7 to 10.9 mm)
0.368 in. (9.35 mm}
Hand brake for parking ............................
Mechanical, acting on rear wheels.
Brake discs:
— Minimum thickness from wear ...............
0.354 in. (9 mm)
STEERING
Type ..............................................
Steering wheel turns, lock to lock .................
Corresponding rack travel ........................
Turning circle diameter ...........................
Front wheel toe-in, unladen ......................
Rack and pinion, breakaway column
with two universal joints, twin equal
length tie rods.
3
4.6 in. (117 mm)
32.5 ft. (9.9 ml
+3/32 to +5/64 in. (+2.5 to +6.0 mm)
FRONT SUSPENSION
Type ..............................................
Caster, unladen ..................................
Camber, unladen .................................
Independent, control arm, strut bar,
knuckle pillar and strut assembly with
integral shock absorber and coil spring.
+6°10’
0° to «1"
REAR SUSPENSION
Type ..............................................
Camber, unladen .................................
Toe-in, unladen ...................................
Independent, control arm, knuckle
pillar and strut assembly with integral
shock absorber and coil spring.
-O°45' to ~1°45'
+13/64 to +11/32 in. (+5.0 to +8.5 mm}
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel rim type ...................................
Tires:
— Type ..........................................
— Inflation pressure: Front ......................
Rear .......................
5J x 13 in.
165/70 SR 13 in.
29 psi (2.0 kg/cmi)
32 psi (2.2 kg/cm2)
Page 00-8
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery:
— Voltage .......................................
— Capacity at 20 hr. discharge rate ..............
Alternator:
—— Continuous current rating
Bosch .....................................
Marelli ....................................
Voltage regulator:
— Regulating voltage at 77°F (25°C) .............
Sta rte r:
— Type ..........................................
Power rating
Bosch ............... . .....................
Marelli ....................................
Ignition system:
Type ..........................................
Spark advance ................................
Pickup coil resistance .........................
ignition coil resistance at 68°F (20°C)
primary ...................................
secondary . ................................
Ballast resistor resistance ....................
12
60 Ah
65 amps
55 amps
13.8 to 14.2
Direct drive. Direct engagement by
solenoid and freewheeling pinon.
0.8 kW
0.9 kW
Bosch breakerless electronic
Centrifugal and vacuum
890 to 1285 ohms
1.1 to 1.7 ohms
6,000 to 10,000 ohms
0.85 to 0.95 ohms
00
General Information
Page 00-9
WEIGHTS
Curb weight:
— Vehicles with carburetor
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
2130 lbs.
2120 lbs.
For air conditioning, add ..........................
80 lbs.
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
2130 lbs.
Seating capacity ..................................
2 persons
Carrying capacity ............................ .....
430 lbs.
DIMENSIONS
46.5”
(1180 mm)
~—— 867" (2202 mm) ———n
156.3" (3969 mm)
«— 53.6" (1362 mm) —r
53.3" (1355 mm) —-
*— 61.8" (1570 mm)—'
Page 00-10
CAPACITIES
UNIT
It
QUANTITY
REFILL
kg
U.S. Units
47
—
12.2 gals.
11.6
—
12.2 qts.
Engine sump and
filter t‘)
4.1
3.7
4.3 qts.
Transmission and
Axle
3
2.7
3.2 qts.
SAE 90 oil (not EP) containing
anti-wear additives
0.127
5.3 025.
SAE 90 EP oil or lithium-base
Fuel tank
Radiator, cylinder
jackets and heating
system
Steering box
0.140
Unleaded gasoline with
octane rating of at least
91 (Research Method)
Use 50-50 antifreeze
and water mixture
Low-ash content detergent
oils-AP! Service SE to
to MIL-b46152
I
grease with molybdenum
disulphide
Constant-velocity joints
and boots (each)
—
0.100
3.2 028.
Brake hydraulic
system
0.440
0.440
1 pt.
Clutch hydraulic
system
0180
0.180
6.4 025.
Lithium-base grease with
molybdenum disulphide
DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid to F.M.V.S.S. No. 116
Same as brake system
('1 Total capacity including sump, filter and lines is 5 qts. (4.7 It). Amount indicated in table is requirement for periodic oil changes.
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
ENGINE - 10
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8:
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
Page
10
10
100.00
101.01
101.03
101.05
101.06
101.07
101.15
102.01
102.02
102.04
102.21
102.26
102.58
103.01
104.01
104.02
10A
Specifications ...............................
Torque Specifications .........................
Engine
Removal and Installation .....................
Disassembly ...............................
Assembly .................................
Crankcase and Cylinder Head ...................
Crankshaft and Flywheel ......................
Connecting Rods and Pistons ...................
Camshaft Drive ..............................
ValveMechanism
.......
Auxiliary Drives .............................
Fuel Tank and Lines ..........................
Fuel Pump and Lines .........................
Carburetor and Air Cleaner .....................
Accelerator Linkage ..........................
Fuel Injection System .........................
Exhaust and Emission Control System ............
Lubrication .................................
Radiator and Fan ............................
Water Pump and Ducts ........................
Service Tools ................................
1 0-1
1 0-9
10-1 1
10-21
10-30
10-43
10—57
10-63
10-69
10-71
10-75
10-77
10—81
10-83
10-89
10-91
10-105
10—1 15
10-121
10-123
10-127
1O
Engine:Specifications
Page 10-1
CYLINDER BLOCK-CON-RODS
IN.
MM
Cylinder bore diameter ............................
Cylinder bores are graded into classes with 0.004"
(0.01 mm) progression.
3.4015 to 3.4035
86.400 to 86.450
Auxiliary shaft bushing seats, diameters:
v—drive end .....................................
—inside end .....................................
1.5236 to 1.5248
1.3794 to 1.3805
38.700 to 38.730
35.036 to 35.066
Crankshaft main bearing seat diameter ................
2.1459 to 2.1465
54.507 to 54.520
thrust ring seats ...............................
0.8716 to 0.8740
22.140 to 22.200
Big-end bearing housing diameter ....................
1.9146 to 1.9152
48.630 to 48.646
Thickness of standard big-end bearing .................
0.0603 to 0.0606
1.531 to 1.538
Range of undersize big-end bearings for service ..........
0.010. 0.020,
0.030, 0.040
0.254, 0.508.
0.762, 0.016
-— fit clearance ...................................
0.0014 to 0.0034
0.036 to 0.086
Smallvend bore diameter ...........................
0.9425 to 0.9438
23.939 to 23.972
Small-end bushing O.D. ...........................
0.9455 to 0.9465
24.016 to 20.041
Small-end bushing fit, interference ...................
0.0017 to 0.0040
0.044 to 0.102
Grade 1 .....................................
Grade 2 .....................................
0.8663 to 0.8664
0.8664 to 0.8665
22.004 to 22.007
22.007 to 22.010
Piston pin-smalI-end bushing fit:
—clearance of new parts ...........................
0.0004 to 0.0006
0.010 to 0.016
:0.0039
10.10
DESCRIPTION
Length of rear main bearing seat between
Big-end bearings:
Small~end bushing ream bore, fitted
Maximum misalignment between c/ls of connecting rod
small-end and big-end:
measured at 4.92" (125mm) from the shank ..........
Page 10-2
PISTON —- PINS — RINGS
DESCRIPTION
IN.
MM
at right angles to C/L of piston pin:
~at 1.08" (27.5mm) from piston skirt edge
Class A .....................................
Class C......................................
Class E ......................................
3.3999 to 3.4003
3.4007 to 3.4011
3.4015 to 3.4019
86.360 to 86.370
86.380 to 86.390
86.400 to 86.410
Maximum difference in weight between pistons .........
10.0802
£2.59
Oversize piston range..............................
0.0079, 0.0157,
0.0236
0.2, 0.4,
0.6
Grade 1 .....................................
Grade 2 .....................................
0.8660 to 0.8661
0.8661 to 0.8662
21.996 to 21.999
21.999 to 22.002
Piston ring groove width
Top groove ..................................
Center groove ................................
Bottom groove ...............................
0.0604 to 0.0612
0.0799 to 0.0807
0.1562 to 0.1570
1.535 to 1.555
2.030 to 2.050
3.967 to 3.987
Standard piston pin diameter
Grade 1 .....................................
Grade 2 .....................................
Oversize piston pin range for service ..................
0.8658 to 0.8659
0.8659 to 0.8660
0.0079
21.991 to 21.994
21.994 to 21.997
0.2
Piston ring thickness
—first: compression ring ...........................
-second: oil ring .................................
4third: oil ring with oilways and expander .............
0.0582 to 0.0587
0.0779 to 0.0783
0.1545 to 0.1553
1.478 to 1.490
1.978 to 1.990
3.925 to 3.947
—clearance of new parts ...........................
0.0011 to 0.0019
0.030 to 0.050
Piston pin in boss: clearance of new parts ..............
0.0001 to 0.0003
0.002 to 0.008
Piston ring fit (side clearance)
—first: compression ring, clearance of new parts .........
wsecond: oil ring, clearance of new parts ..............
—third: scraper ring, clearance of new parts ............
0.0018 to 0.0030
0.0016 to 0.0028
0.0011 to 0.0024
0.045 to 0.077
0.040 to 0.072
0.030 to 0.062
0.0118 to 0.0177
0.30 to 0.45
Diameter of standard service pistons, measured
Piston boss bore diameter
Piston fit in here, measured at right angle to pin,
1.08” {27.5mm) from piston skirt edge
Ring end gap in bore:
—first: compression ring ...........................
—second: oil ring .................................
0.0118 to 0.0177
0.30 to 0.45
—third: scraper ring ...............................
0.0098 to 0.0157
0.25 to 0.40
Oversize piston ring range, for service .................
0.0079, 0.0157,
0.0236
0.2, 0.4,
0.6
10
Engine: Specifications
Page 10-3
CRANKSHAFT — MAIN BEARINGS
IN.
MM
Main bearing journal standard diameter................
1.9990 to 1.9997
50.775 to 50.795
Standard main bearing insert thickness ................
0.0722 to 0.0730
1.834 to 1.840
Main bearing inserts, for service......................
0.01, 0.02,
0.254, 0.508,
0.03, 0.04
0.762, 1.061
Crankpin standard diameter ........................
1.7913 to 1.7920
45.498 to 45.518
Main bearing-to-journal fit:
-—clearance of new parts ...........................
0.0019 to 0.0037
0.050 to 0.095
Length of rear main bearing journal,
shoulder-to-shoulder ...........................
1.0620 to 1.0640
26.975 to 27.025
Rear main bearing seat thrust ring thickness ............
0.0909 to 0.0929
2.310 to 2.360
Thickness of oversize thrust rings ....................
0.0959 to 0.0979
2.437 to 2.487
—c|earance of new parts ...........................
0.0021 to 0.0104
0.055 to 0.265
Max. misalignment of main bearing journals ............
0.0012*
003*
Max. misalignment of crankpins to main bearings
journals .....................................
$0.014
$0.35
Max. out—of—rou nd of crankshaft jou rnals
and crankpins, after grinding .....................
0.0002
0.005
Max. taper of crankpins and journals, after grinding ......
0.0002
0.005
Squareness of flywheel resting face to crankshaft
centerline:
— Max. allowable tolerance with dial indicator set
laterally at a distance of about 1 11/32" (34mm) from
crankshaft rotation axis............................
0.0010
0.025
0.0039
0.10
0.0039
0.10
DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft end play, thrust ring installed:
Flywheel:
—para|lel relationship of driven plate face to crank-
shaft mounting face: max. allowable tolerance ..........
”squareness of above faces to rotation axis:
max. allowable tolerance ...........................
*Total indicator reading
Page 10-4
CYLINDER HEAD
DESCRIPTION
IN.
MM
Valve position ...................................
Overhead, inclined 18°
Operation ......................................
Single ohc
Drive ..........................................
Toothed belt
Valve guide bore .................................
0.5492 to 0.5499
13.950 to 13.970
Outside diameter of valve guide......................
0.5527 to 0.5534
14.040 to 14.058
Valve guide oversize on 0.0., for service ...............
0.0079
0.2
Inside diameter of valve guides, fitted in cylinder head. . . .
0.3158 to 0.3165
8.022 to 8.040
Valve guide fit in head: — interference ................
0.0025 to 0.0043
0.063 to 0.108
Valve stem diameter ..............................
0.3139 to 0.3146
7.974 to 7.992
Valve stem fit in valve guide: nclearance of new parts . . . .
0.0012 to 0.0026
0.030 to 0.066
Valve seat angle in cylinder head .....................
45° t5’
Valve face angle..................................
45° 30’ 15'
Valve head diameter
intake ......................................
exhaust .....................................
1.4173
1.3031
36
33.1
Width of valve seats in cylinder head (contact su rface):
—intake and exhaust, about.........................
0.0787
2
intake ......................................
exhaust .....................................
1.1811
1.0531
30
26.75
Lift on CIL of valve (without play)
intake ......................................
exhaust .....................................
0.3622
0.3641
9.2
9.25
Diameter of tappet bores in head ....................
1.4567 to 1.4577
37.000 to 37.025
Outside diameter of tappets ........................
1.4557 to 1.4565
36.975 to 36.995
Fit clearance between tappets and bores in head .........
0.0002 to 0.0020
0.005 to 0.050
Thickness of cap plates ............................
0.1456 to 0.1850
(in 0.0019
progressions)
3.70 to 4.70
(in 0.05
progressions)
Inside diameter of valve seats in cylinder head
10
Engine: Specifications
Page 10-5
VALVE SPRINGS
Valve spring installed height (A) under
a load of
.
85.7 lbs (38.9 kg) ..................
32.8 lbs (14.9 kg) ...................
Valve spring installed height under
131 lbs (59.5 kg) ....................
a load of
62 lbs (28.1 kg) .....................
Minimum permissible load, referred to height (A) ........
INNER SPRING
OUTER SPRING
2
1.220 in (31 mm)
1.417 in (36 mm)
—
—
.846 in (21.5 mm)
29.5 lbs (13.5 kg)
1.043 in (26.5 mm)
—
79 lbs (36 kg)
VALVE MECHANISM —- CAMSHAFT
IN.
MM
Diameter of bearing bores in head:
—drive end......................................
1.1807 to 1.1816
29.989 to 30.014
middle .......................................
—intermediate, flywheel side ........................
—flywheel end ...................................
DESCRIPTION
-
—intermediate, drive side...........................
Diameter of camshaft jou rnals:
1.8890 to 1.8900
47.980 to 48.005
1.8968 to 1.8976
1.9047 to 1.9057
1.9126 to 1.9136
48.180 to 48.205
48.380 to 48.405
48.580 to 48.605
1.1795
1.8878
1.8957
1.9035
1.9114
29.944 to 29.960
47.935 to 47.950
48.135 to 48.150
48.335 to 48.350
48.535 to 48.550
—drive end......................................
—intermediate, drive side...........................
—middle .......................................
— intermediate, flywheel side ........................
—flywheel end ...................................
1.1787 to
1.8872 to
1.8951 to
1.9030 to
1.9108 to
Fit between bores in head and camshaft journals:
—fit clearance ...................................
0.0012 to 0.0028
Cam lift: —+ l nlet .................................
0.362
— Exhaust ..............................
Valve clearance:
.
.. Inlet opens ...................................
.
— Inlet closes ...................................
...
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
— Exhaust opens .....
— Exhaust closes .................................
0.030 to 0.070
9.2
9.25
0.364
12°
52°
52°
12°
B.T.D.C.
A.B.D.C.
B.B.D.C.
A.T.D.C.
Page 10-6
VALVE MECHANISM — TAPPETS
Standard tappet bore diameter ......................
1.417 to 1.418
37.000 to 37.025
Standard tappet O.D. .............................
1.456 to 1.457
36.975 to 36.995
Tappet fit clearance...............................
0.0001 to 0.0019
0.005 to 0.050
Shim thickness ..................................
0.146 to 0.185
in 0.002 steps
3.70 to 4.70
in 0.05 steps
.024
.027
.011 to .014
.015 to .018
0.60
0.65
0.28 to 0.35
0.38 to 0.46
IN.
MM
Diameter of bushing bores in crankcase:
~drive end ......................................
«- Inside end .....................................
1.5236 to 1.5248
1.3794 to 1.3805
38.700 to 38.730
35.036 to 35.066
Inside diameter of bushings finished in bores:
—drive end ......................................
— inside and .....................................
1.4041 to 1.4049
1.2598 to 1.2606
35.664 to 35.684
32.000 to 32.020
Diameter of shaft journals:
—drive end ......................................
-— Inside end .....................................
1.4013 to 1.4023
1.2575 to 1.2583
35.593 to 35.618
31.940 to 31.960
Valve clearance
—for checking
valve timing
—for general operation
adjusted cold
Inlet ......................
Exhaust ....................
Inlet ......................
Exhaust ....................
AUXILIARY SHAFT
DESCRIPTION
Fit between bushings and bores in crankcase............
Fit between bushings and shaft journals:
— fit clearance
interference fit at all times
0.0017 to 0.0036
0.0016 to 0.0031
0.044 to 0.091
0.040 to 0.080
"‘*
10
Engine
Page 10-7
FUEL SYSTEM (VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR)
Carburetor
Type .......................................................
2-barrel downdraft with vacuum
controlled secondary, mechanical and
vacuum accelerator pumps. and an
automatic choke
Float level ..................................................
0.266 to 0.285 in. (6.75 to 7.25 mm)
Fuel Pump
Type .......................................................
Mechanical
Capacity equal to or greater than ...........................
19.8 gal./hr. (75 L/hr.)
Control lever stroke ........................................
10.098 in. (2.5 mm)
Fuel pressure at 4000 RPM ................................
3.5 to 4.3 'psi
FUEL SYSTEM (VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION)
Fuel Injection System
Type .......................................................
Bosch L—Jetronic with Lambda sensor
System test pressure ......................................
33 to 39 psi (2.3 to 2.7 bar}
Fuel Pump
Type .......................................................
Electric
Fuel pressure ..............................................
39 to 45 psi (2.7 to 3.2 bar)
.21.
Page 10-8
.-
LUBRICATION
'
/
Oil Pump
Type .........................................
gear
Pump Drive ....................................
by auxiliary shaft
Oil pressure relief valve ...........................
built into oil pump
Clearance between gears upper side
and cover mating face .........................
0.0008 to 0.0041 in. (0.020 to 0.105 mm)
Clearance between gears and pump housing inside wall. . .
0.004 to 0.007 in. (0.11 to 0.18 mm)
Play between drive and driven gears .................
0.0059 in. (0.15mm)
Full flow oil filter with by-pass .....................
disposable cartridge type
Low oil pressure indicator sending unit ...............
electric
Oil pressure at 212°F (100° C) ......................
49.7 to 71 psi (3.5 to 5 kg/cmzl
!
‘
COOLING SYSTEM
--
Water Pump
Type ..........................................
' Pump Drive .....................................
centrifugal, vane type
'
Vee belt
Fit between impeller vanes and pump housing ..........
0.031 to 0.051 in. (0.8 to 1.3mmi
Radiator cooling fan drive. . . . , .....................
electric motor
Cooling fan control ...............................
cut-in temperature.............................
cutout ......................................
radiator mounted temperature switch
92 i 2° C (198° F)
87 : 2°C (189° F)
Thermostat
—begins opening at ...............................
«maximum opening at ............................
—travel of valve ..................................
172.4° to 1832" F (78° to 84° C)
'
194° to 201° F (90° to 94°C)
0.295 in (7.5mm)
Water temperature indicator ........................
electric (gauge)
Radiator cap valve opening pressure ..................
11 psi (0.8 kg/cml)
Radiator overflow recovery .........................
plastic expansion tank
|
.
(
10
Engine
Page 1 0-9
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE FIGURE
Kgm
F1. Lb.
DESCRIPTION
THREAD
N-rn
Bolt, main bearingcap............ .................
M 10 x 1.25
80
8.2
59
24.4
2.5
18
ENGINE
Bolt, engine breather ...... ,_ ..........
."
Bolt, cylinder head to crankcase ”5:55
.' ...........
.-.
M 8
'“1.
_-)-‘
See torque procedure on pg. 10-48
See torque procedure on pg. 10-51
— 19 mm hex ................. ‘. L'; . q. . . . . .\ .....
— 17 mm hex ................ .' . . . _.'............
M 12 x125
M 10 x 1.25
”Nut, cylinder head to crankcase stud ...............
M 12 x 1.25
93
9.5
Bolt, cylinder head extension‘to cylinder head ......
M8
20
2
Nut. intake and exhaust manifold to cylinder head
M 8
27
2.8
20
Nut. connecting rod bolt ............................
M 9.x 1
51
5.2
38
Bolt, self-locking, flywheel to crankshaft. . . .. ......
M 10 x 1.25
83
8.5
61
Bolt, camshaft sprocket ............................
M 1-0 x 1.25
83
8.5
61
Nut. bearing to belt tensioner support ..............
M 10 x 1.25
44
4.5 .,
33
Bolt. oil pump shaft drive gear ...................... I M 10 x125
83
8.5
61
Nut, drive pulley on crankshaft ..................... T; M 20 x 1.5
137
14
101
Bolt, alternator lower support to crankcase .........
M 10 x 1.25
49
5
36
. Nut, alternator to lower support ....................
M 10 x 1 .25
49
5
35
Nut self- locking nylon lined alternator to
upper support .................................
M 10 x 1.25
49
5
36
Bolt. air pump to support ...........................
M 9
29
3
22
Bolt. air pump support to cylinder head extension ..
M 8
29
3
22
Bolt, water pump to crankcase .....................
M 8
29
3
22
69
.
"4
14
1
2
t
i
J.
'
l
Page 10—10
DESCRIPTION
Bolt, A/C compressor support to crankcase
THREAD
N-m
TORQUE FIGURE
Kgm
Ft. Lb.
........
M 10 x 1 .25
49
5
36
fiQlt-oht bracket to A/ C compressor ..............
M 10 x 1 .25
49
5
36
x —‘,8olt, rear bracket to A/C compressor
...............
M 10 x 1.25
49
5
Spark plugs ........................................
M 14 x 1.25
37
3.8
27
Bolt, crosspiece to body ....................
........
M 10 x 1.25
59
6
43
Bolt, rubber mount to engine ...............
........
M 8
14.5
1.5
11
. Bolt. rubber mount to transmission ..........
......
M8
24.4
2.5
18
N ut. rubber mount to transmission ...............
..
M8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt. rubber mount to crosspiece ..........
.........
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt, engine reaction rod ...................
. .......
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
ENGINE MOUNTS
,....i.
"“"‘"--....
u
|
36
Engine Assembly
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles with Carburetor)
NOTE: Engine and transmission are removed as an assembly
through bottom of engine compartment.
Loosen fuel cap. Remove cap from expansion tank. Drain
cooling system.
Loosen clamp holding fresh air duct (3) to fan.
Disconnect hoses from side of air cleaner (1). Remove three
nuts (2) and washers holding cover on air cleaner.
Remove four nuts holding air cleaner on carburetor. Lift air
cleaner. disconnect hose from bottom and remove air cleaner
with fresh air duct.
1. Air cleaner
2. Nuts
3. Fresh air duct
NOTE: Mark lines, hoses and wires prior to removal to identify
for installation.
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect fuel return hose (6) and charcoal canister hose (5)
from carburetor.
On vehicles with air conditioning, disconnect hose from last
idle valve (2) and unplug compressor clutch wire connector.
Disconnect wires (1) from idle shutoff solenoid and carburetor fan thermoswitch.
Disconnect gulp valve and charcoal canister hoses (3 and 4)
from intake manifold.
1. Wires
2. Fast idle valve
3. Hose
4. Hose
5. Hose
6. Fuel hose
Remove clamp (1) holding fuel hoses to firewall and separate
from firewall.
Disconnect fuel inlet hose (2) from fuel pump. Remove distributor cap [3) and rotor.
Disconnect distributor wire connector at distributor. Disconnect
wires from gulp valve thermoswitch (6), coolant temperature
sending unit (4), and oil pressure sending unit (5).
Discona throttle cable by removing Spring clip (7) at end
of cable and "E" ring at base of bracket (8).
1. Clamp 2. Fuel inlet hose 3. Distributor cap
4. Coolant temperature sending unit 5. Oil pressme sending unit
5. Gulp valve tharrnoswitch 7. Spring clip 8. Bracket
100.00
Page 1041
Loosen clamps and remove coolant hoses (8 and 10) from
housing (11).
Disconnect coolant hose (1) at union.
Disconnect two expansion tank hoses (6 and 7) at housing.
Remove bolt (5) and two nuts holding expansion tank (4) and
remove tank.
Unplug reverse light switch wire (9) at connector.
Disconnect vacuum hose (2) from electrovalve (3). On air
conditioned vehicles, disconnect fast idle electmvalve vacuum
hose from vacuum tree.
1. Coolant hose
5. Bolt
6. Hose
2. Vacuum hose
7. Hose
3. Electrovalve
8. Coolant hose
4. Expansion tank
9. Wire
10. Coolant hose
11. Housing
Hold spring (2) compressed and remove cotter pin, spring.
and remaining washer from end of operating cylinder rod (3).
Remove two bolts (5) holding cylinder (4) to support plate.
Move cylinder out of way.
Disconnect speedometer drive (1) from transmission.
Disconnect wires from starter.
1.5peedometerdrive
2. Spring
3. Cylinderrod
4.0peratingcylmder
5. Bolts
Remove rear access panel from inside trunk.
Remove two nuts (1) and clamp (5) attaching exhaust pipe (6)
to manifold (7).
Remove shield (4) from end of alternator (3).
Remove nut and cable (2) from alternator and unplug charge
indicator wire connector.
1.Nuts 2.Cable
7. Manifold
3.Alternator
4.Shield
5.Clarnp
6.Exhaustpipe
Engine Assembly
100.00
Page 10-13
0n vehicles with air conditioning, discharge system by slowly
bleeding freon to prevent excessive loss of system oil.
WARNING: Wear safety glasses. Do not discharge freon
near open flame. a toxic gas may result.
Disconnect high and low pressure lines (2 and 3) from compressor (1). Cap open hoses and fittings.
1. Compressor
2. Line
3. Line
Raise and support rear of vehicle. Remove rear wheels.
Remove six screws and four bolts retaining rear grille assembly
and remove rear grille assembly.
Disconnect six springs (1 and 3) supporting muffler (2) and
lower complete exhaust system from vehicle.
1. Springs
2. Muffler
3. Springs
Disconnect ground strap (1) from chassis.
Remove six Allen head bolts (3) from transmission end of left
side half-shaft (4].
Repeat above procedure to disconnect right side half-shaft
from transmission.
NOTE: Discard Allen bolts and replace with new ones for
installation. Torque to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgm).
1. Ground strap
2. Inner CV joint
3. Allen bolts
4. Half-shaft
Page 10-14
Remove three protective shields (6 and 15).
Remove two bolts (9) holding transmission link (7) to selector rod (10).
Loosen bolt (5) at transmission end of transmission link. Swing link out of way.
Remove two brake cable support brackets (14) from iron! control arm brackets (12).
Remove four control arm nuts (1, 2 and 13) and bolts (8), noting number and position of shims between control arms (3 and 16) and
mounting brackets. Swing control arms downward and out of their brackets.
NOTE: SuSpension assemblies may be removed completely by removing brake calipers and nuts securing strut assemblies at top.
Attach a lift sling A.60592 to engine/transmission lifting eyes and lift slightly.
Remove four bolts (11) holding crosspiece (4).
1,Nut
2_Nut
15. Shield
3.Controlarm
16. Control arm
4.Crosspiece
5.Bolt
6.8hield
7.Link
830"
9. Bolts 10.Rod
ll.Bolt
12.Bracket
13.Nut
14.Brackot
Engine Assembly
Remove through bolt (2) holding reaction rod (1) to bracket
(3) on engine.
1. Reaction rod
2. Bolt
3. Bracket
Remove coolant hose (1) from water pump.
Remove through bolt (3) holding front engine mount (2).
Raise vehicle slightly and rock engine/transmission assembly
to clear front engine mount.
Carefully raise vehicle while supporting engine/transmission
assembly. Slide assembly out from under vehicle.
Install engine in reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts
and bolts to specifications.
Refill cooling system to proper level and check all lines and
hoses for tightness.
1. Coolant hose
2. Engine mount
3. Bolt
100.00
Page 10-15
Page 10-16
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
NOTE: Engine and transmission are removed as an assembly
through bottom of engine compartment.
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Loosen fuel cap. Remove cap from expansion tank. Drain
cooling system.
Loosen clamps (1 and 3) and remove air supply hose (2) after
disconnecting attached vacuum hoses.
Plug Openings to prevent dirt from entering.
CAUTION: Relieve fuel
system
pressure before discon—
necting fuel lines. To do this, remove vacuum
hose (5) from fuel pressure regulator (4). Connect vacuum pump to regulator and pump vacuum
up to 20 inches.
1. Clamp
2. Air supply hose
5. Vacuum hose
3. Clamp
4. Fuel pressure regulator
NOTE: Mark lines. hoses and wires prior to removal to identify
for installation.
Disconnect the following electrical connectors: cold start
valve (10), ground points (14), throttle switch (7), fuel injectors (8), voltmeter (4), fuel injector fan thermoswitch (6) and,
on vehicles with air conditioning, compressor clutch (5).
[5}.
Also
inlet
and,
(13)
disconnect charcoal canister vacuum hose (11), fuel
hose (9). alternator cooling duct (1), fuel return hose (2)
on vehicles with air conditioning, fast idle electrovalve
vacuum hose (12) and vacuum source hose (3).
1. Cooling duct
2. Fuel hose
3. Vacuum hose
4, Voltmeter connector 5. Compressor clutch connector
6. Thermoswitch 7. Throttle switch 8. Fuel injector
9. Fuel inlet hose
12. Vacuum hose
10. Cold start valve
11. Vacuum hose
13. Fast idle electrovalve
14. Ground points
Disconnect throttle cable by removing Spring clip (1) at end
of cable and “E" ring at base of bracket (2).
Disconnect connectors from oil pressure sending unit (3),
coolant temperature sending unit (7) and thermotime switch (6).
Flemove distributor cap (5) and rotor. Disconnect distributor
wire {4i at distributor.
Disconnect wires from starter.
1. Clip
2. Bracket
3. Oil pressure sending unit 4. Distributor wire
5. Distributor cap 5. Thermotime switch
7. Coolant temperature sending unit
.v
.mmo n
.L "‘4
Engine Assembly
Disconnect two expansion tank hoses (1 and 3) at housing (8).
Remove bolt (2) and two nuts holding expansion tank (9) and
remove tank.
Loosen air cleaner hose clamp (6) at air flow sensor (7).
Remove two nuts holding air cleaner to body and remove air
cleaner (4) with hose (5).
1. Hose
2. Bolt
7. Air flow sensor
3. Hose
4. Air cleaner
8. Housing
6. Clamp
5. Hose
9. Expansion tank
Unplug reverse light switch wire connector (6).
Disconnect coolant temperature sensor connector (8) and
auxiliary air regulator connector (9).
Hold spring (1) compressed and remove cotter pin, spring,
and remaining washer from end of operating cylinder rod (3).
Remove two bolts (7) holding cylinder (5) to support plate (4).
Move cylinder out of way.
Disconnect speedometer drive (2) from transmission.
1. Spring 2. Speedometer drive 3. Cylinder rod
5. Cylinder 6. Connector 7. Bolts
4. Support plate
3. Coolant temperature sensor connector
9. Auxiliary air regulator connector
From inside trunk. remove floor mat. Remove three screws
retaining insulation panel and remove insulation panel.
Remove feur screws holding floor panel (2). Remove floor panel.
Remove 10 screws holding access panel (1). Loosen clamp (4)
on cooling duct (3). and remove access panel complete with
duct
1. Access panel
2. Floor panel
3. Cooling duct
4. Clamp
100.00
Page 10-18
Unplug Lambda sensor connector (6) and remove Lambda
sensor (4) from exhaust pipe.
Remove three nuts (5) attaching exhaust pipe to manifold (7).
Remove shield (1) from end of alternator. Remove nut and
cable from alternator.
On vehicles with air conditioning, discharge system by slowly
bleeding freon to prevent excessive loss of system oil.
WARNING: Wear safety glasses. Do not discharge freon
near open flame. a toxic gas may result.
Disconnect high and low pressure lines (3) from compressor
(2). Cap open lines and fittings.
1. Shield 2. Compressor 3. Line
B. Connector 7. Manilold
4. Lambda sensor
5. Nuts
Raise and support rear of vehicle. Remove rear wheels.
Remove six screws and four bolts retaining rear grille assembly
and remove grille assembly.
Remove two bolts (2) holding exhaust system support (3) to
transmission bracket.
Disconnect six springs (1 and 4) supporting muffler (5) and
lower complete exhaust system from vehicle.
1. Springs
2. Bolts
3. Support 4. Springs
5. Muffler
Disconnect ground strap (1) from chassis.
Remove six Allen head bolts (3) from transmission end of
left side half-shaft (4).
Repeat above procedure to disconnect right side half-shaft
from transmission.
NOTE: Discard Allen bolts and replace with new ones for
installation. Torque to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgm).
1. Ground strap
2. Inner CV joint
3. Allen bolts
4. Hallvshaft
100.00
Engine Assembly
Page 10-19
Remove two bolts holding protective shield under fuel pump and remove shield.
Remove three remaining protective shields (7).
Remove two bolts (8] holding transmission link to selector rod (9).
Loosen bolt (5) at transmission end oi transmission link. Swing link out of way.
Remove two brake cable support brackets (13) from from control arm brackets (11).
Remove four control arm nuts (1. 2 and 12) and boltsi6). noting number and position of shims between control arms (3 and 14} and
mounting brackets. Swing control arms downward out of their brackets.
NOTE: Suspension assemblies may be removed completely by removing brake calipers and nuts seCuring strut assemblies at top.
Support engine/transmission assembly.
Remove four bolts (1 O} holding crosspiece (4).
1. Nut
2. Nut
13. Bracket
3. Control arm
14. Control arm
4. Crosspiece
5. Bolt
6, Bolt
7. Shield
8. Bolts
9. Selector rod
10. Bolts
11. Bracket
12. Nut
Page 10-20
Remove through bolts ll and 3) retaining reaction rod to
brackets and remove reaction rod (2).
1. Bolt
2. Reaction rod
3. Bolt
Remove coolant hose (2) from water pump.
Remove through bolt {3) holding front engine mount (1).
Raise vehicle slightly and rock engine/transmission assembly
to clear front engine mount.
Carefully raise vehicle while supporting engine/transmission
Slide assembly out from under vehicle.
Install engine in reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts
and bolts to specifications.
Refill cooling system to proper level and check all lines and
hoses for tightness.
1. Mount
2. Hose
3. Bolt
Engine Assembly
100.00
Page 1 0-21
DISASSEMBLY
Place engine in a suitable engine stand.
Remove oil dipstick.
Drain oil and remove oil filter.
Disconnect vacuum line from distributor.
Remove not (7). lockwasher (6), and clamp (2) holding dis—
tributor to engine. and remove distributor (1 ).
Remove bolt (5) and washer from cyclonic trap (3).
Remove cyclonic trap and gasket (4) with hose attached.
1. Distributor
6. Lockwasher
2. Clamp 3, Cyclonic trap 4, Gasket
5. Bolt
7. Nut
Remove three bolts (3), lockwashers (2). and washers (1)
holding starter to transmission.
Remove starter (4) from transmission.
1. Washers
2. Lockwashors
3. Bolts 4. Starter
On vehicles with fuel injection, use a 5 mm hex wrench to
remove two bolts (3) holding auxiliary air regulator (7) to cylinder block. Remove regulator with hoses (‘l and 6) attached.
1. Hose 2. Clamp 3. Allen bolt
7. Auxiliary air regulator
4. Clip
5. Clamp
6. Hose
Remove two bolts (5) and remove shield (6) from transmission.
Remove the following: bolt (10), three bolts (3), lockwashers
(2). washers (1). nut (8), and washer (7) and separate transmission and shield (9) from engine.
Slowly (a few turns each bolt) remove six bolts to remove
clutch assembly from flywheel.
1. Washer 2. Lockwesher 3. Bolt 4. Transmission 5. Bolt
6. Shield 7. Lockwasher 8. Nut 9. Shield 10. Bolt
On air conditioned vehicles, remove two nuts (8), washers (7),
bolts (2). and washers (3).
Remove belt (12) and compressor (1) complete with brackets
(11).
Remove bolts (4 and 10) and lockwashers (5 and 9) to remove
mount (6).
1. Compressor
6. Mount
12. Belt
2. Bolt 3. Washer 4. Bolt 5. Lockwasher
?. Washer 8. Nut 9. Lockwasher 10. Bolt 1 1. Brackets
On vehicles with integral voltage regulator, remove bolt (7),
nuts, washers, lockwashers. and bolt (6) holding alternator
to engine.
Remove alternator (3).
0n vehicles with separate voltage regulator, remove bolts.
washers. lockwashers holding alternator to engine.
Remove alternator (8).
Remove drive belt.
Remove bolts (5 and 17) to remove mounting brackets (4, 11,
and 14).
1. Bolt 2. Bracket 3. Alternator (with integral voltage regulator)
4. Bracket 5. Bolt 6. Bob 7. Bolt 8. Alternator (with separate
voltage regulator) 9. Spacer 10. Spacer 11. Bracket 12. Bolt
13. Bolt 14. Bracket 15. Bolt 16. Bolt 17. Bolt
Engine Assembly
lf equipped with air pump. loosen clamp (12) to disconnect
hose (1) from check valve (16).
Remove bolt (6), washer (5), and bolt (13) to remove air pump
(2) with hoses (1 and 14) attached.
Remove drive belt.
Remove bolts (3 and 8) and washers (4 and 9)-to remove mounting bracket (10).
If not equipped with air pump. disconnect hose (1 1 ) from reed
valve (17).
Remove locknut (15) holding check valve (16) or reed valve
(17). Unscrew and remove valve.
1. Hose
2. Air pump
7. Bracket
12. Clamp
13. Bolt
(with air pump)
3. Bolt
9. Washer
8. Bolt
14. Hose
4. Washer
6. Bolt
5. Washer
11. Hose
10. Mounting bracket
15. Locknut
16.‘Check valve
17. Reed valve (without air pump)
If equipped with EGR, remove three nuts (1), bolt (7), and
washers (2 and 8) to remove tube (3). spacer (27) and gasket
(26).
Remove two nuts (5), washers (6), and shieldM).
Unscrew fining (25) to remove tube (9).
Remove gasket (10) and seal (24).
Disconnect vacuum line (23) from EGR valve (13).
Remove bolts ( 11 and 20) and washers (12 and 19) to remove
EGR valve (13) and gasket (18).
Loosen clamp (21) to disconnect water hose (22) from water
manifold.
Remove two bolts (14) and washers (15) to remove mounting
base (16) and gasket (17).
1. Nut 2. Washer 3. Tube 4. Shield 5. Nut 6. Washer 7. Bolt
8. Washer 9. Tube 10. Gasket 11. Bolt 12. Washer
13. EGR valve 14. Bolt 15. Washer 16. Mounting base 17. Gasket
18. Gasket
19. Washer
23. Vacuum line
20. Bolt
24. Seal
21. Clamp
25. Fitting
22. Hose
26. Gasket
27. Spacer
Loosen clamp and remove hose (2).
Remove two bolts and remove water manifold (3) and gasketl4).
Remove four bolts and washers holding water pump (5) to
engine. Remove water pump and gasket (6).
Remove four bolts and washers holding thermostat assembly
(1) to engine. Remove thermostat assembly and gasket.
1. Thermostat assembly 2. Hose
5. Water pump
6. Gasket
3. Water manifold 4. Gasket
100.00
Page 10-23
Page 1c24
Remove four bolts (17), iockwashers (16)
and washers (15) to remove timing belt
covers (12 and 13) (14 and 18 for air pump
equipped vehicles).
Remove attaching hardware (1 to 3, 5 to 7,
and 9 to 11) to remove shields (4 and 8).
1. Nut 2. Lockwasher 3. Washer 4. Shield
5. Bolt 6. Washer 7. Bolt 8. Shield 9.Washer
10. Lockwasher 11. Nut 12 and 13. Timing
belt covers 14 and 18. Timing belt covers (with
air pump)
15. Washer 16. Lockwesher
17. Bolt
Stop engine rotation by installing tool A.60640 on flywheel.
Remove two bolts (9) holding timing indicator (10) and remove indicator.
Remove camshaft sprocket bolt (11) and auxiliary shaft sprocket bolt (12).
Remove drive pulley nut (13) using wrench A.50121.
Remove out (1), washers and spacer (2).
Press bracket (3) against tensioner in right engine mount (4) then remove pulley (5) and timing belt (8).
Remove tensioner support bracket (3) from stud (7), and remove stud.
Remove three bolts (8) holding engine mount (4) and remove mount.
Remove camshaft sprocket (14), auxiliary shaft sprocket (15), drive pulley (16) and belt drive
sprocket (19).
Remove nuts and bolts holding belt shields (17 8t 18) and remove shields.
l4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Nut
Spacer
Tensioner support bracket
Right engine mount
Tansioner pulley
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Timing belt
Stud
Bolt
Bolt
Timing indicator
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Bolt
Bolt
Nut
Camshaft sprocket
Auxiliary shaft sprocket
16.
17.
18.
19.
Drive pulley
Belt shield
Belt shield
Belt drive sprocket
100.00
Engine Assembly
Page 10-25
On vehicles with carburetor, remove clamp (2) and fuel pump
line (3) at carburetor (1). Leave filter (4) and fuel lines attached
to pump (5).
Remove two nuts (12) and washers (11) from studs (10) holding pump to engine. Carefully remove pump from engine,
being certain that actuating rod (7) is removed. When reassembling, make sure that gaskets (6 and 8) and insulator
(9) are installed in order shown.
NOTE: Gasket (8) comes in three different sizes which are
used to adjust pump stroke (pressure).
1. Carburetor
6. Gasket
11. Washer
2. Clamp
3. Fuel hose
7. Actuating rod 8. Gasket
4. Fuel filter
9. Insulator
5, Fuel pump
10. Stud
12. Nut
Disconnect water line (1) from thermovalve housing (2) to carburetor (3) at carburetor by loosening clamp (4).
Disconnect main vacuum line (5) by pulling free at vacuum manifold (6).
Disconnect vacuum lines (7) to carburetor by pulling free at carburetor.
NOTE: In order to minimize confusion during reinstallation of lines. do not remove thermovalves (8) or vacuum lines from thermovalve housing (2) unless they are to be replaced.
Remove two nuts (9), lockwashers (10) and washers (11).
Remove thermovalve housing (2) with attached lines and vacuum manifold (6).
1.Waterline 2. Thermovalve housing
10. Lockwasher 11.Washer
9. Nut
3. Carburetor
4. Clamp
5. Main vacuum line
6. Vacuum manifold
7. Vacuum lines
B.Thermovalves
On vehicles with carburetor. remove (our nuts (1) and lock
washers (2) holding carburetor (3) and spacer (4) to intake
manifold.
Remove carburetor (3) and spacer (4).
1. Nut
2. Lockwasher
3. Carburetor
4. Spacer
Remove three nuts [Hand washers (2) holding shield (3) to exhaust manifold (4). Remove shield.
Remove seven nuts (6) and vvashers (71 holding intake (5) and exhaust (4) manifolds to engine.
Remove manifolds and gaskets (B and 9).
«levees-sum,—
N U!
_ Washer
Shield
Exha usl ma nifold
Intake manifold
N U!
. Washer
Gasket
. Gasket
Using cylinder head tool A.50131, remove five nuts on carburetor side and five bolts on spark plug side.
Carefully remove cylinder head assembly. Lay on wooden blocks to protect Open intake and exhaust valves from being bent.
Remove and discard cylinder head gasket.
To disassemble cylinder head, refer to 101.01.
Engine Assembly
0n vehicles with fuel injection, disconnect accelerator cable
from linkage.
Remove two nuts (8) and washers holding cooling air duct (6)
to studs (4) on manifold (5).
Disconnect cooling air hose from duct. Remove duct.
Remove four nuts (2) and washers holding air intake to manifold.
Carefully lift air intake (1) off studs (4) in manifold. Tilt air intake
backwards.
1. Air intake 2. Nut 3. Gasket 4. Stud
6. Cooling air duct 7. Nut 8. Nut
5. Manifold
Remove four nuts (4) and washers (3) holding air intake manifolds (1 ) to engine.
Remove intake manifolds.
1. Air intake manifolds
2. Stud
3. Washer 4. Nut
Remove three nuts (1) and washers holding shield (3) to ex—
haust manifold (4).
Remove nuts (5) and washers holding exhaust manifold to
engine.
Remove exhaust manifold.
Using tool A501 31 for 1 9 mm hex bolts and nuts or tool A.501 72
for 17 mm hex bolts. remove five nuts or bolts on intake side
and five bolts on spark plug side.
Carefully remove cylinder head assembly. Lay on wooden
blocks to protect open intake and exhaust valves from being
bent
Remove and discard cylinder head gasket.
To disassemble cylinder head, refer to section 101.01.
1. Nut
2. Washer
6. Washer
3. Shield 4. Exhaust manifold
5. Nut
100.00
Page 10-27
Page 10-28
Remove three bolts (4) and lockwashers holding auxiliary
shaft lock plate (lland seal (2).
Remove plate/seal and then remove shaft (3).
1. Auxiliary shaft lock plate
2. Seal
3. Auxiliary shaft
4. Bolt
Remove six bolts (3) and washer plate (4) holding flywheel (2)
to crankshaft, remove flywheel.
1. Tool A.60640
2. Flywheel
3. Bolt
4. Washer plate
Turn engine upsidefclown and remove twenty bolts (1) and
lockwashers l2) holding oil pan (3).
Remove pan and gasket (4).
1. Bolt
2. Lockwasher
3. Oil pan
4. Gasket
-
'
_
_.
"‘
Engine Assembly
w 100.00
Page 10-29
Remove six bolts and lockwashers holding flywheel end cover
plate (3). Remove plate and gasket.
Remove five bolts and lockwashers holding timing gear end
cover plate (51. Remove plate and gasket.
Remove three bolts (2) and lockwashers holding oil pump
assembly (4). Remove pump and gasket.
Remove bolt (6) holding oil return pipe (1) and remove pipe.
1. Oil return pipe 2. Bolt 3. Flywheel end cover plate
assembly 6. Timing gear and cover plate 6. Bolt
4. Oil pump
Remove nuts (1) holding connecting rod end caps (2). Remove
caps complete with hearing inserts.
Remove four rod-piston assemblies from the top of cylinder
block.
NOTE: Turning crankshaft will make this operation easier.
Remove bolts (3) holding main bearing caps (4). Remove caps
along with lower bearing inserts.
1. Nut
2. Connecting rod end caps
3. Bolt
4. Main bearing caps
Remove crankshaft and take out upper bearing inserts.
Remove two thrust ring halves (1) from saddle bore at flyv
wheel end.
1. Th rust ring halves
Page 10-30
ASSEMBLY
install cylinder block on workstand.
After thorough lubrication with clean engine oil, out main
bearing inserts into position and install crankshaft (2).
NOTE: Before and during installation of crankshaft refer to
Crankshaft and Flywheel for procedures and inspections.
The two thrust ring halves (1) are positioned at the flywheel
and saddle bore. Thrust rings may be installed before or after
mounting crankshaft.
‘l. Thrust ring half
2. Crankshaft
Install main bearing caps l1) and lubricated inserts.
Make sure caps are installed at proper location. Cap without
notch is at timing gear end of crankcase, then cap with one
notch. etc.
Torque cap bolts to 59 ft. lbs. (8.2 kgml.
1. Main bearing caps
Install new seal and gasket on flywheel and cover plate (1).
Install carer/seal to crankcase with six bolts (2) and lockwashers.
NOTE: Arrows in illustration indicate that with cover installed, the distance between cover seal and crankshaft should
be equal all around.
1. Flywheel end cover plate
2. Bolt
100.00
Engine Assembly
wmseweppr
Bolt and Iockwasher
Water iacket cover plate
Gasket
Gasket
Bolt and Iockwesher
Cover plate
Gasket
. Bolt and lockwasher
. Water jacket cover plate
1D.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Gasket
Flywheel end cover plate
Oil seal
Bolt and Iockwasher
Bolt and Iockwasher
Oil drain plug
Oil sump
Gasket
GASKETS AND SEALS
Page 10-31
18.
19.
.
21 .
22.
23.
24.
.
Gasket
Auxiliary shaft Iockplate
Bolt and Iockwesher
Oil seal
Gasket
Timing gear end saver plate
Oil seal
Bolt and lockwasher
Page 10-32
Secure flywheel to crankshaft with washer plate (1) and six
bolts {2}.
Lock crankshaft against turning with tool A.60640 (3).
Torque bolts to 61 ft. lbs. (8.5 kgm).
1. Washer plate
2. Bolt
3. Tool A.60640
After lubricating pistons (11 and cylinder bores with clean
engine oil, install connecting rod-piston assemblies in cylinder
bores using appropriate piston ring compressor (2).
NOTE: Before and during installation of connecting rod-piston
assemblies, refer to CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS for
procedures and inspections.
install assemblies in the proper cylinder, according to number
stamped on connecting rods and caps. When installation is
complete these numbers should face away from auxiliary
shaft.
1. Piston
2. Piston ring compressor
Lubricate bearings and crankpins with clean engine oil.
Attach connecting rods/bearings to crankpins.
Install end caps/bearings (1) and torque nuts (2) to 38 ft.
lbs. {5.2 kgml.
1. Connecting rod end caps
2. Nut
Engine Assembly
100.00
Page 10-33
Install new seal and gasket on timing gear and cover plate (1).
Install coverr'seal to crankcase with five bolts (2) and lockwashers.
NOTE: Arrows in illustration point to references for controlling centering with respect to crankshaft.
1. Timing gear and cover plate
2. Bolt
Lubricate bushings for auxiliary shaft (3) with clean oil, install
shaft. Secure shaft in place with three bolts (4), lockwashers,
Iockplate (1), new seal (2) and gasket.
install auxiliary shaft sprocket with bolt and washer. do not
torque fully at this time.
1. Lockplate
2. Seal
3. Auxiliary shaft
4. Bolt
Install oil pump (1) and gasket. Before final tightening of bolts
I5), install oil pump and distributor drive gear, coupling it to
gear on auxiliary shaft.
Temporarily fit distributor (3) into crankcase.
While using sprocket (2) to rotate auxiliary shaft, secure oil
pump by tightening the three bolts alternately.
NOTE: If auxiliary shaft binds or crawls during rotation,
loosen pump and repeat operation.
Install oil return pipe (4) with one bolt (6) and lockwasher.
Install timing belt drive sprocket (7) and generator drive pulley
(8). Install pulley nut (9), and with flywheel blocked, torque
nut to 101 ft. lbs. (14 kgml.
1. Oil pump 2. Auxiliary shaft sprocket 3. Ignition distributor
4. Oil return pipe 5. Bolt 6. Bolt 7. Timing belt drive sprocket
8. Generator drive pulley 9. Pulley nut
Page 10-34
Install oil sump and gasket with twenty bolts and lockwashers.
Install cylinder head gasket, making sure that word “ALTO" is
facing up.
Install head assembly complete with valves, springs, and camshaft bearing assembly.
NOTE: Before and during cylinder head installation refer to
CHANKCASE AND CYLINDER HEAD Section for
precedures and inspections.
On vehicles with 19 mm hex nuts and bolts, install five bolts
{1), and nuts (2), and flat washers.
Gradually tighten in sequence shown and in at least two stages.
Final torque will be 69 ft. lbs. [9.5 kgm).
Special wrench A.50131 I3) is required for intake side nuts.
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Wrench A.50131
0n vehicles with 17 mm hex bolts, torque the bolts as follows:
a Lubricate all head bolts and washers with SAE 30 engine oil.
Let excess oil drop from bolts and washers for 30 minutes.
NOTE: In the next steps tighten and torque cylinder head bolts
in sequence as shown.
- Using wrenches A.50172, torque all cylinder head bolts to
14.5 ft. lbs. l2 kgm).
- Retorque all cylinder head bolts to 29 ft. lbs. (5 kgrn).
' 0 Apply paint marks to one corner of all the head bolts and a
corresponding mark to the cylinder head.
C Using wrenches A.50172, tighten all head bolts to a 90°
angle {1).
a Retighten all head bolts to a second 90° angle (2).
PAINT MARKS
CYLINDER HEAD
NOTE: All cylinder head bolts must have been tightened a
CYLINDER HEAD
BOLT
-\
total of 180° in two separate stages.
.
900
2
90
O
100.00
Engine Assembly
Page 10-35
Install belt guards (17 and 18).
Install camshaft sprocket (14) with bolt (11) and washer. Do not torque fully at this time.
install right engine mount (4) with three bolts (8) and Iockwashers.
install spring tensioner in its seat in mount.
Install tensioner pulley support stud (7) and bracket (3) to crankcase.
.
Install tensioner pulley (5) to bracket and lock it temporarily with nut (1), washers and spacer (2).
Install timing indicator (10) with two bolts (9) and lockwashers.
1. Nut
2. Spacer
3. Tensioner support bracket
4. Right engine mount
5. Tensioner pulley
6. Timing belt
7. Stud
8. Bolt
9. Bolt
10. Timing indicator
11. Bolt
12. Bolt
13. Nut
14. Camshaft sprocket
15. Auxiliary shaft sprocket
16. Drive pulley
17. Belt shield
18, Belt shield
19. BE": drive sprocket
Page 10-36
Crank engine with tool A.50459 until crankshaft pulley mark (3) is aligned with TDC timing mark (7).
Position camshaft sprocket so that marks (1) and (2) are aligned.
NOTE: Auxiliary shaft sprocket (8) does not have to be aligned.
Move idler pulley in direction of arrow as far as possible and secure in place with not.
Install timing belt (9) with slack on tensioner side.
CAUTION: Always install a new timing belt. Timing belts cannot be reused. Under no circumstances must belt tension be
adjusted following its initial installation.
Ensure that timing belt teeth are perfectly coupled with sprockets.
Loosen idler pulley not (4) and tensioner will tighten belt. Torque idler pulley nut in this position to 33 ft. lbs. (4.5 kgm).
Check that timing marks are still correctly aligned.
With flywheel blocked, torque auxiliary shaft sprocket bolt (5) and camshaft sprocket bolt (6) to 61' ft. lbs. (8.5 kgrn).
.ommummt-a
. Camshaft sprocket mark
. Reference mark on timing belt guard
. Crankshaft pulleyr mark
. idler pulley nut
. Auxiliary shaft sprocket bolt
.Camshaft sprocket bolt
.TDC timing mark
. Auxiliary shaft sprocket
. Timing belt
. Pulley drive belt
Engine Assembly
On vehicles with carburetor, install intake manifold (1), exhaust manifold (2). and gaskets with seven nuts and washers.
Torque to 20 ft. lbs. (2.8 kgm).
Install shield (3) with three nuts and washers.
1. Intake manifold
2. Exhaust manifold
3. Shield
0n vehicles with carburetor. install carburetor (1) and spacer
(2) with four nuts (3) and washers.
1. Carburetor
2. Spacer
3. Nut
Install water pump (1) and gasket with four bolts (2) and lock—
washers. Torque to 22 ft. lbs. (3 kgm).
Install water manifold (3) and gasket with two bolts (4) and
lockwashers.
1. Water pump
2. Bolt
3. Water manifold 4. Bolt
100.00
Page 10-37
0n vehicles with carburetor. install EGR mounting base (1),
gasket and tube {5i with two bolts (2) and lockwashers.
Install tube {6) and shield (11} to exhaust manifold fitting and
to EGR mounting base with two nuts (9) and lockwashers.
Install EGR valve (3) and gasket with two bolts (4) and lock—
washers.
1, E68 mounting base
6.1'ubs
2. Bolt
3. EGR valve
7. Nut B.Tube 9. Nut
10. Spacer
4. Bolt
5. Tube
11. Shield
Attach thermostat housing (1) and gasket to cylinder block
with four bolts (21 and lockwashers.
Attach water manifold hose (3) to thermostat housing.
1. Thermostat housing
2. Bolt
3. Water manifold hoes
- On vehicles with carburetor, install fuel pump (5) with gaskets
! l6 and 8}, insulator l9), and actuating rod (7).
_ Retain pump to studs (10) with two nuts (1 2) and washers (1 1 l.
I NOTE: Gasket [8) comes in three difierem sizes which are
used to adjust pump stroke (pressure).
Secure fuel lines (3] and filter (4) to carburetor with clamps (2).
. 1. Carburetor
: 6. Gasket
' 11. Washer
2. Clamp 3. Fuel hose 4. Filter 5. Fuel pump
7. Actuating rod 3. Gasket 9. Insulator 10. Stud
12. Nut
“my
100.00
Englne Assembly
Page 10—39
0n vehicles with carburetor, install thermovalve housing assembly (1) with two nuts (2) and lockwashers.
Attach vacuum and water lines as shOWn.
1. Thermovalve housing assembly
2. Nut
To AUTOMATIC
CHOKE
FROM
AUTOMATIC
CHOKE T0
INTAKE MANIFOLD
TO
CARBUHETOR
VACUUM SOURCE
TO CARBURETOR
ACCELERATOR PUMP
TO
ELECTRO VALVE
T0 CARBUHETOR
POWER VALVE
T0
T0
WATER MANIFOLD ' 1:
I
EGR VALVE
_
_ 33
"2 1" l
-' .."_.—.c3:;
TO INTAKE
MANIFOLD VACUUM
Install cyclonic trap (1) in engine with hose attached. Install
\ ______rr_..
bolt (3) and lockwasher (2).
__£______.fl
/
kgm)
(2.3
Torque to 17 ft. lbs.
L
V
——-_-_--/
r
1.Cyclonictrep 2. Lockwesher 3. Bolt
_ ____ _
/ / \ \
I
'____—-—-—---"'—'—_'
/
0n vehicles with fuel injection. install intake manifolds (4)
to cylinder head.
Install air intake (1) and gaskets (3) to intake manifolds with
nuts [2] and washers.
Install cooling air duct (5).
Attach auxiliary air regulator to engine with two Alien bolts
and washers. Install regulator with hoses attached. Make
sure that clip is installed under both clamps.
1. Air intake 2. Nut
5. Cooling air duct
3. Gasket
4. Intake manifolds
Install distributor. make sure that cylinder No. 1 is on com—
pression stroke {both valves closed).
Turn crankshaft until notch on pulley it) is lined up with TDC
indicator plate (2).
1. Pulley 2. TDC indicator plate
Remove distributor cap and rotate shaft until rotor faces
terminal on can corresponding to cylinder No)? #-
Without moving the rotor from its original position. insert
distributor {1) in crankcase.
Secure distributor with not (3) and clamp (2).
Final adjustment of timing will be accomplished with a timing
light. Refer to 551.01.
1. Distributor
2. Clamp
3. Nut
Engine Assembly
100.00
Page '10-41 /42
Install alternator support (1) to engine with 4 bolts (2) and
torque to 36 ft. lbs. (5 kgm).
1. Alternator support
2. Bolt
Install alternator bracket (4) to water pump housing with two
bolts.
Place alternator (6) on bracket and secure in place with two
bolts (5).
If equipped with air pump, inatall pump support (2) to cam
housing with four bolts and torque bolts to 22 ft. lbs. (3 kgm).
Attach air pump (1) to bracket (4) and support (2) and secure
in place with two bolts (3 and 7).
To adjust belts. refer to 101.15.
1.Air pump
2. Support
3. Bolt
4. Bracket
5. Bolt
6. Alternator
7. Bolt
If equipped with air conditioning, attach compressor (1) and
brackets (2) to support and alternator (4) with bolts, washers.
and nuts (3).
To adiust belt, referto 101.15.
1. Air conditioning compressor
2. Bracket
3. Nut
4. Alternator
"'./
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
101.01
Page 10-43
CRANKCASE
CHECKING CYLINDER BOHES
Carefully examine cylinder bore surfaces. if only slight scoring
or scratches are found, dress bores.
Use extra fine emery cloth wrapped around a hone.
Make sure piston clearance in bore does not exceed .006 in.
(0.15 mm).
NOTE: For a new assembly, the piston clearance in bore,
measured at right angle to pin and 1.08 in. (27.5 mm) from
piston skirt edge is .0011 to .0019 in. (.030 to .050 mm).
Zero dial indicator (1) using gage A.96148 (2).
Check cylinder bores at three points, both lengthwise and crosswise. if wear or out of round is such as to require reconditioning,
the following should be adhered to.
if metal to be removed is less than .006 in. (0.15 mm), honing will do.
If it exceeds .006 in. (0.15 mm) the cylinder block should be rebored.
Cylinders should not be rebored beyond .0236 in. (0.6 mm).
1. Dial indicator gauge
2. Standard bore gage A.96148
1a measurement
23 measurement
ii
3a measurement
Page 10—44
Bores should be reconditioned in relation to diameter of
oversize pistons aVailable (.0079, .0157, .0236 in. — 0.2, 0.4,
0.6 mm) and to specified clearance of .0011 to .0019 in.
[0.030 to 0.050 mm) between pistons and bores.
As shown, letters are stamped on bottom face of cylinder
block, opposite each bore, to indicate their diameter. This is
done since the actual bore may vary from 3.4015 to 3.4035 in.
{86.400 to 86.450 mm) and bores are selected in .0004 in.
(0.01 mm} classes.
Standard pistons are also selected in classes and must be
matched with cylinder bores belonging in the same class (Refer
to CONNECTING RODS AND PISTONS).
Cylinder Block Gasket Surface
The cylinder block gasket surface may become warped or
distorted.
Using a surface plate coated with lampblack, check for spots
where metal must be removed to make surface perfectly level.
The check may also be accomplished with a straightedge (1)
and feeler gage (2).
The straightedge should be placed in line with the diagonals of
cylinder block surface, and lengthwise in the middle.
When refacing cylinder block, care should be taken to remove
as little metal as possible.
1. Straightedge
2. Feeler gage
Auxiliary Shaft Bares and Bushings
Check that bushings press fitted in crankcase bores are not
out-of-round or loose and that oil holes are in exact alignment
with crankcase oilways.
Inner surface of bushings should be smooth and free from
scuffing. Replace if damaged.
Should it become necessary to replace bushings, remove old
ones from bores using driver A.60372/1/‘2 (1) for drive end
bushing l3) and A.60372/1 for inside bushing.
1. Driver A.II372I1
2. Tool A.6037212
3. Bushing, drive and
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
101.01
Page 10-45
Bushings are press fitted to their own bores in crankcase. First
//
drive and bushing using driver A.60372/1/2.
,.
install inside bushing (2) using driver A.60372/1 (1) and then
When installing bushings, make sure to position them so that
bushing oil hole is perfectly aligned with oil passage from
crankcase.
1. Driver A.60372!1
2. Inside bushing
Bushings should be finished reamed using tool A.90365 (1)
to specified inside diameter after they have been press fitted
in place. to ensure a correct fit and alignment of auxiliary
shaft journals (refer to specifications on previous page).
1. Reamer A.90365
pin
2. Cutter
3. Bushing, drive end
4. Centering
Distributor and Oil Pump Drive Gear Bushing
Check that bushing {1) has not ovalized or become loose in
bore. Inner surface should be smooth and show no traces of
wear. Replace if necessary (refer to LUBRICATION).
1. Buahing
,II-
Page 10-46
CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Carburetor)
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Drain cooling system.
Disconnect hoses from side of air cleaner (1). Remove three
nuts (2) and washers holding cover on air cleaner.
Remove four nuts holding air cleaner on carburetor. Lift air
cleaner. disconnect hose from bottom and remove air cleaner
with fresh air duct (3).
1. Air cleaner
2. Nuts
3. Fresh air duct
NOTE: Mark lines. hoses and wires prior to removal to identify
for installation.
From carburetor, disconnect fuel inlet and return hoses (4),
charcoal canister hose (2) and all remaining vacuum and
coolant hoses.
Disconnect three electrical connectors (1) from carburetor.
Disconnect throttle linkage (5) at carb'uretor.
Remove four nuts (3) holding carburetor. Remove carburetor
and spacer.
‘l. Connectors
2. Hose 3. Nut
4. Fuel hose
5. Throttle linkage
Remove two nuts (1) and washers holding reaction rod bracket
(6) to cylinder head.
Remove through bolt holding reaction rod (2) to body bracket.
Set reaction rod and bracket assembly to one side with vacuum
tree and hoses attached.
Remove two bolts (3) holding thermovalve housing assembly
(5) and remove it without disconnecting lines from housing.
Remove three bolts and disconnect thermostat housing (4)
from head. Coolant hoses can remain attached to housing,
1. Nuts
2. Reaction rod 3. Bolt 4. Thermostat housrng
5. Thermovalve housing 6. Bracket
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
101.01
Page 1 047
Disconnect spark plug wires {2).
Disconnect wires from gulp valve thermoswitch (1) and coolant temperature sending unit (4).
Disconnect throttle cable by removing spring clip (6) at end
of cable and two bolts (7) holding bracket (8) to head.
On vehicles with air pump, disconnect hose (5) from check
valve (3).
1. Gulp valve thermoswitch 2. Spark plug wire 3. Check valve
4. Coolant temperature sending unit 5. Hose 6. Clip 7. Bolt
8. Bracket
Removing timing belt cover (one-piece cover) or upper and
lower timing belt cover halves (two-piece cover).
Disconnect coolant hose (3) from water pump.
0n vehicles with air pump (1). remove two bolts (4) holding
air pump and remove pump.
Remove four bolts attaching air pump support (2) to cam hous—
ing and remove support.
On vehicles with air conditioning, remove bolts and nuts
holding alternator and remove alternator. Alternator may
be placed to one side without disconnecting electrical leads.
If alternator bracket is a one-piece assembly attached to both
head and block. remove attaching bolts and bracket.
1. Air pump
2. Support
3. Hose
4. Bolt
Loosen tensioner pulley nut (1) and remove timing belt (2)
from cam sprocket.
Remove bolts (3) and nuts holding belt guard (4) and remove
guard.
1. Tensioner pulley nut
2. Timing belt
3. Bolt
4. Belt guard
Page 1 0-48
'
r
Remove rear access panel from inside trunk.
Remove two nuts (1) and clamp (3) attaching exhaust pipe (4)
to manifold 12).
Disconnect charcoal canister hose (7) from exhaust manifold.
~_.
,
Disconnect EGR valve lines (Bl at EGR valve (5). then dis~
connect lines at manifolds.
Disconnect remaining hoses from intake manifold.
1. Nuts
6. Line
2. Manifold
7. Hose
3. Clamp
4. Exhaust pipe
5. EGR valve
Remove cylinder head hold down bolts and nuts. Nuts on carburetor side will require special wrench A.50131. Remove head.
Installation is reverse of removal.
Refer to CAMSHAFT DRlVE (101.06) for timing of valve assembly.
install all new gaskets. Head gasket is installed with word “ALTO" facing up.
Tighten hold down bolts and nuts in order shown. Torque in at least two stages. Final torque is 69ft. lbs. (9.5 kgm).
NOTE: If cylinder head has 17 mm hex hold down bolts, refer to torquing procedure on page 10-51.
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Wrench A.5013'l
----
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
101.01
Page 1 0-49
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles with Fuel Injection)
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Drain cooling system.
Loosen clamps (1 and 3) and remove air supply hose (2) after
disconnecting attached vacuum hoses.
Plug openings to prevent dirt from entering.
CAUTION: Relieve fuel system before disconnecting fuel
lines. To do this, remove vacuum hose (5) from
fuel pressure regulator (4). Connect vacuum
pump to regulator and pump vacuum up to 20
inches.
1. Clamp
2. Hose
3. Clamp
4. Fuel pressure regulator
5. Vacuum hose
NOTE: Mark lines. hoses and wires prior to removal to identify
for installation.
Disconnect the following electrical connectors: cold start
valve (3). ground points (6), throttle switch (7), fuel injectors
(13), and fuel injector fan thermoswitch (12).
Also
start
lator
(10).
with
disconnect charcoal canister vacuum hose (1), cold
valve fuel hose (4), fuel inlet hose (2), auxiliary air regu.
hose (5). distributor vacuum hose (8). fuel return hose
fuel pressure regulator vacuum hose (9) and, on vehicles
air conditioning. vacuum source hose (11).
1. Vacuum hose 2. Fuel hose 3. Cold start valve 4. Fuel hose
5. Vacuum hose 6. Ground points 7. Throttle swrtch
8. Vacuum hose 9. Vacuum hose 10. Fuel return hose
11. Vacuum hose 12. Injector fan thermoSwitch 13. Fuel injectors
Disconnect throttle linkage by removing spring clip from
linkage cable and at bellcrank (6).
Remove bolt (1) and washers holding fuel pressure regulator
bracket (2) to air intake (3).
Remove two nuts (4) and washers holding fuel injector cooling
air duct (5) to manifold studs.
Disconnect air hose from duct and remove duct.
Remove four nuts and eight washers holding air intake to
manifold.
Carefully tilt air intake backwards off studs and remove from
vehicle.
1. Bolt 2. Bracket
6. Bellorank
3. Air intake
4. Nuts
5. Cooling air duct
Page 10-50
Remove two Allen bolts (2) and pull auxiliary air regulator
[31 away from head. Hoses and electrical lead can remain
attached to regulator.
Disconnect throttle cable by removing Spring clip (1) at end
of cable and two bolts (8) holding bracket (5) to head.
Disconnect spark plug wires (4).
Disconnect connectors from coolant temperature sending
unit {6) and thermotime switch (7).
'r
l
1. Spring clip 2. Allen bolt 3. Auxiliary air regulator
4. Spark plug wire 5. Bracket 6. Coolant temperature sending unit
7. Thermotime switch 8. Bolts
.5'— '
Remove two nuts (4) and washers holding reaction rod bracket
[5} to cylinder head.
Remove through bolt (1) holding reaction rod (6] to body brac-
ket. Remove reaction rod and bracket assembly.
Remove three bolts (2} and disconnect thermostat housing
[3} from head. Coolant hoses and electrical lead can remain
attached.
1. Bolt
2. Bolt
6. Reaction rod
3. Thermostat housing
4. Nuts
5. Bracket
From inside trunk, remove floor mat, insulation panel, floor
panel and access panel.
Remove three nuts (3] attaching exhaust pipe (2) to manifold(4).
On vehicles with air conditioning, remove bolts and nuts
holding afirnator (1) and remove alternator. Alternator may
be placed to one side without disconnecting electrical leads.
if alternator bracket is a one-piece assembly attached to both
head and block, remove attaching bolts and bracket.
1.Alternator
2. Exhaust pipe
3. Nuts 4. Manifold
101.01
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
Page 10~51
Remove upper and lower timing belt cover halves.
Loosen tensioner pulley nut (1) and remove timing belt (2)
from cam sprocket.
Remove bolts (3) and nuts holding belt guard (4) and remove
guard.
1. Tensioner pulley nut
2. Timing belt
3. Bolt
4. Belt guard
4‘).
1
&
Remove cylinder head hold down bolts and nuts. Nuts on intake side will require special wrench A.50‘l31. Remove head.
NOTE: Engines built after number 4028877 (without air conditioning) or 4037356 (with air conditioning) are
equipped with 17 mm hex bolts. Use special wrench
A.50172.
Installation is reverse of removal.
Refer to CAMSHAFT DRIVE (101.06) for timing of valve
assembly.
Install all new gaskets. Head gasket is installed with word
“A LTO” facing up.
0n vehicles"
kgrn).
0n ve
__
3‘“ ’-
'
.‘
mm bolts and riots; tighten bolts in order shown. Torque in at least two stages. Final torque is 69 ft..|bs. (9.5
.
2.4;- '3. ‘
.
'- " s with 17 mm bolts, lubricate all bolts and washers with SAE 30 engine oil. Let excess oil drip from bolts and washers
for 30 minutes.
"\
NOTE: In the next steps, tighten and torque cylinder head bolts in sequence shown.
‘1,
‘
Using wrenches A.50172 torque all cylinder head bolts to 14.5 ft. lbs. (2 kgm).
Retorque all bolts to 29 ft. lbs. (4 kgm).
Apply paint marks to one corner of all head bolts and a corresponding mark to the cylinder head.
Using wrenches A.50172, tighten all head bolts to a 90° angle (1).
Retighten all head bolts to a second 90° angle (2).
NOTE: All cylinder head bolts must have been tightened a total of 180° in two stages.
PAINT MARKS
90°
CYLINDER HEAD
CYLINDER HEAD
BOLT
Page 10-52
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMB LY
Remove camshaft housing cover (1) by removing six nuts (2).
Remove intake and exhaust manifolds.
Remove camshaft housing (5) from cylinder head by removing
six bolts (3) and six nuts (4).
1. Camshaft housing cover
housing
2. Nut
3. Bolt
4. Nut
5. Camshaft
Position valve spring compressor (1) A.603l1 as shown and
compress spring {2) to release spring locks (4) (if spring locks
are stuck in grooves carefully tap spring cup (3), taking care
not to damage valve stem}.
Remove springs and cups.
Remove spark plugs.
Remove oil seals and take out valves from bottom side of
head.
1. Valve spring compressor A.60311
4. Spring locks
2. Valve spring
3. Spring cup
To reassemble head reverse above procedure.
Before installing valve springs, install valve seals (2) on valve
guides (4) with pilot A.60313 (1).
Place oil seal on pilot, and mount pilot on valve stem.
Press seal down onto upper end of valve guide with installer
A.603‘l3/2.
1. Pilot A.6031 311
2. Oil seal
3. Valve stem
4. Valve guide
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
Cleaning Cylinder Head
Clean carbon from combustion chambers using wire brush
driven by a portable electric drill.
Flemove carbon deposits from exhaust ducts and descale water
jackets.
Inspect and clean intake ducts and oilways to camshaft lobes
and tappets.
Inspecting and Refacing Gasket Surface
Apply a thin coating of Iarnpblack on a surface plate and run
cylinder head mating face over it. The resulting contact
pattern should be evenly spread over the whole cylinder head
gasket surface. If it is not. there is distortion and the head will
have to be refaced on a surface grinder as shown. Be sure to
remove only enough stock to Correct the faulty condition.
After refacing, combustion chamber depth must be checked
with gage A.96238 (1) to make certain it has not been reduced
beyond allowable limits.
With gage resting at center of combustion chamber, the gap
between gage and gasket surface should not exceed .010 in.
(0.25 mm). If gap exceeds .010 in. (0.25 mm), replace head.
1. Depth gage A.96238
2. Feeler gage
101.01
Page 10-54
Inspecting and Refacing Valve Seats
Valve seats must show no evidence of pitting on contact face. If pitted, they must be refaced.
Using appropriate valve guide pilot that provides the tightest fit in guide, fix taper stone assembly (1) to guide.
Make sure taper stone has angle of 45° i 5' and is new or recently dressed.
Start grinder before stone contacts seat, otherwise seat may be damaged.
Ul-
1. Taper stone assembly
VALVE AND VALVE SEAT ANGLES
Once valve seats have been refaced, seat width should be narrowed.
Install reamer assembly (1) on valve guide pilot and carefully ream seat.
Use a 20° reamer (2} and a 75° reamer (3) alternately until the width of intake and exhaust seats is dimension L = .083 to .087
in. {2.1 to 2.2 mm).
1. Reamer assembly
2. 20° reamer
3. 75° reamer
101.01
Crankcase and Cylinder Head
Page 10-55
VALVES
INSPECTING AND REFACING VALVES
Clean carbon from valves with power wire brush.
Inspect valve stem for distortion and signs of cracking, replace valve if necessary.
of valve head margin
Serviceable valve may be refaced at angle of 45° 30' i 5'. At completion of refacing, check that thickness
(3) is at least .020 in. (0.5 mm).
stem height after refacing,
Should it become necessary to grind valve stem tip to eliminate dishing due to wear or to reduce
remove only what is necessary.
edge. If there is any
With each valve reinstalled in its seat, use gage A.96219 (1) to check that stem (2) tip just grazes the gage
tip.
grinding
by
height
stern
reduce
gage,
and
stem
between
interference
1. Gage A.96219
2. Valve stem
3. Valve head margin
.020 IN.
(0.5 MM)
MINIMUM
VALVE GUIDES
INSPECTING AND REPLACING VALVE GUIDES
Valve guides are press fitted in their bores with an interference
fit of .0025 to .0043 in. (0.063 to 0.108 mm).
They should be replaced when scored or worn or when there is
excessive clearance between them and the valve stem, which
cannot be corrected by replacing valve.
Valve stem fit clearance in guide is .0012 to .0026 in. (0.030
to 0.066 mm) for both intake and exhaust valves, and maxi
mum wear limit is .006 in. (0.15 mm).
1.4173 in
mm
L36
__
__;_..\
INTAKE
/
'
'55:) 30, :5,
,3”
x? _
é
1.3031 in
33,1 mm
/- —.._...___—
EXHAUST
Page 10-56
When replacing valve guides, use driver A.60395 (1) for disassembly and driver A.60462 for reassembly.
NOTE: Replacement valve guides are prefinished and unless
minor damage occurs during assembly no reaming is required.
Should damage occur use reamer A.903‘ID to refinish bore.
1. Driver A. 60395
VALVE SPRINGS
Inspect valve springs for cracks or weakening.
Test spring tension using appropriate spring tester; then
compare tension and deflection data on tester with specifications shown.
1.545 m.,41.s mr—
1.220 114.31“
.846 m, 21.5 ma
T
_
LBS 33 21
No 14910
ms 54.. 2 5
I
Kg 211 1 :1. 2
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTING VALVE INNER SPRING
LBS as 23.3
in, 33.9 21.5
'_.
2.122 "L, 53.9 Mill—r
1.417 "I, 35 “H
1.043 |N., 26.5MM
I
LBS m 15.5
IIq 59.5 22.5
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TESTING VALVE OUTER SPRING
101.03
Crankshaft and Flywheel
Page 10-57
MAIN BEARING JOURNALS AND CRANKPINS
INSPECTION
Carefully inspect crankshaft for cracks on main bearing journals and crankpins as well as on crank arms. If any are detected,
crankshaft should be replaced to prevent failure. Should journals show light traces of scuffing, these can be dressed off by using
an extra- fine carborundum stone.
If deep scoring is discovered, or if micrometer measurements of journals shew an out-of-round condition in excess of .0002 in.
2.1459 "1., 54.5071“!
2.1485 ”1., 54,520 MM
(.005 mm), journals will have to be reground to next undersize.
.0718 |Il., 1,825 MM
.UTZ1IN., 1,831MIII
1.9990 111., 50,775 Mill
1.9998 01., 50,795 MM
When regrinding journals, be sure to pay special attention to
specified fit clearances in relationship to undersize bearing
range available for service. Depending on amount of wear,
main bearing journals and crankpins should be reground to
undersize diameter shown in tables.
The same journal radius that existed originally should be
maintained.
MAIN BEARING THICKNESSES
Standard
l
Undersiza bearings
.01 in
bearings
.03 in
.02 in
l
(0.254 mm) 1 (0.508 mm)
.0818 in
.0768 in
.0118 in
.04 in
(03162 mm)
(1.016 mm}
.0868 in
.0913 in
(1.925 mm) (1.952 mm) (2.079 mm) (2.203 mm) (2.339 mm)
to
1D
to
to
.0871 in
.0821 in
.07'1'1 in
.0721 in
(2.212 mm) (2.339 mm)
(2.085 mm)
(1.831 mm) (1.968 mm)
to
.0921 in
MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETERS
._
5““‘md l
Undersize
.01 in
(0.254 mm)
I
.02 in
(0.508 mm)
1
.03 in
(0.362 mm)
.04 in
(1.016 mm}
19990011 1.999001. 1.9790 in‘ 1.9690011 1.9590111
(50.775 mm); (50. 521 mm) (.50 2617 mm) (50. 0113 turn) (49.159 mm)
1.9999 in
1.9998 in
1.9199 in ‘ 1.9698 in
to
1.9591T in
(30.795 111.111) (50.541 mm)!(50.287 mm)i (50.033 mm) (49.719 mm]
Page 10-58
)l
\.
1.7913 m., 45,493 uu
1.7920 m, 45,513 Im
rJIOZ m
rum:
H.181 m.
l
mass m
r2] um
rmnu
r10!”
r 3.0HM
1.9990 In.. 50,775“
1.999: m, 50,795“
SPECIFICATIONS OF CRANKSHAFT JOURNALS, CRANKPINS AND SHOULDER RADll
After journals have been ground to size and polished, crankshaft must be thoroughly cleaned to remove all metal and
abrasive particles.
To clean oilways properly, welch plugs must be removed. Then
ream plug bores using reamer A.94016. Thoroughly flush oilways with solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
After completing above operations, drive new welch plugs into
place with driver A.8601D l1) and stake them with a punch.
1. Driver A.8601D
Checking Crankshaft Balance
Place two parallel blocks (2) on a surface plate.
Set crankshaft—flywheel-clutch assembly (1) on parallel blocks.
If assembly shows a tendency to roll towards one side, stick
some putty on opposite side until assembly stops moving.
Weighing amount of putty used will provide an indication of
unbalanced weight.
To correct situation. drill holes on flywheel at point D (next
figure} as required to remove corresponding weight of metal.
1. Crankshaft-flywheel-clutch assembly
2. Parallel blocks
Crankshaft and Flywheel
101.03
Page 10-59
Flywheel and Ring Gear
Inspect condition of ring gear teeth. If there is any obvious damage, replace ring gear.
in an oil bath.
A hydraulic press should be used to install new ring gear onto flywheel, after heating gear to 176°F (80°C)
or scores. SurMake sure flywheel contact surfaces with crankshaft and clutch driven disc are smooth and free from scratches
axis.
rotation
flywheel
to
angles
faces should also be perfectly flat and at right
in excess of .004
Flotate flywheel centered on crankshaft: a dial indicator resting at points B and C should not show variations
in. [0.1 mm).
.0137IN.
sasmmr
.0137 IN.
fl
0.35m
.0012 m.
0.03MM
l
.0012 iii
0.0s
l
.0012 m.
0.03 MM
l
Maximum allowable misalignment of journals and crankpins, and diagram for checking flywheel contact surfaces with clutch
disc and crankshaft flange.
assembly
{A-B-C—E = points for checking alignment and squareness with respect to rotation axis; D = crankshaft—flywheel-clutch
balancing holes.)
attacking Main Bearing Journals and Crankpins for Misalignment
Rest crankshaft ends on two parallel blocks and check the following with a dial indicator.
Main journal misalignment: maximum allowable tolerance .0012 in. (0.03 mm) (total dial gauge reading).
Crankpin misalignment: maximum allowable tolerance, with respect to journals. t .0137 in. (i 0.35 mm].
in. (0.005 mm).
Main bearing journal and crankpin out-of—round: maximum allowable tolerance after regrinding, .0002
mm).
Main bearing journals and crankpins taper: maximum allowable tolerance after regrinding, .0002 in. (0.005
laterally some
resting
indicator
dial
a
crankshaft,
Squareness of flywheel resting face to crankshaft centerline: when rotating
mm).
(0.025
in.
.001
of
excess
in
variations
show
not
should
1.34 in. (34 mm) from crankshaft centerline,
straightened using a
If inspection of main bearing journals and crankpins alignment reveals distortions. the shaft should be
structure.
internal
its
damage
hydraulic press, taking care not to subject shaft to excessive stress which could
Page 10-60
Main Bearings
if inspection shows hearings to be scored or have signs of
seizure or abnormal wear, they should be replaced. No recon.
ditioning or adaptation of damaged bearings is possible.
If inspection proves their condition to be satisfactory and fit
for further service, check clearances betwaen bearings and
journals as follows.
Place a length of calibrated wire (1), such as ”Plastigage",
along journal being checked.
1. Plastigage wire
lnstall caps, complete with bearing shells. Tighten cap mount-
ing screws to a torque of 59 ft. lbs. (8.2 kgml.
Remove caps and using scale on Plastigage envelope (1) measure width of flattened wire (2).
Numbers on envelope show value of existing clearance. Normal
clearance between main bearings and crankshaft journals is
.0019 to .0037 in. (0.050 to 0.095 mm).
If clearance does not fall within maximum allowable limit of
.006 in. (0.15 mm), bearings must be replaced with undersize
ones after regrinding crankshaft journals.
1. Measuring envelope
2. Plastigage wire
When checking and replacement procedures have been carried
out. install caps and tighten bolts to 59 ft. lbs. (8.2 kgm)
torque.
Free crankshaft rotation is an indication that assembly has
been performed correctly and bearing clearances conform to
specifications.
Crankshaft and Flywheel
101.03
Page 10-61/62
Crankshaft End Play
Once crankshaft has been installed, check end play between
thrust rings on rear saddle bore and crankshaft shoulders.
lnstall magnetic base dial gage and wedge two screwdrivers as
shown. Using screwdrivers, pry crankshaft back and forth and
check dial gage to see if endwise movement falls within .0021
to .104 in. (0.055 to 0.265 mm).
Should end play prove to be more than maximum allowable
limit of .0137 in. (0.35 mm), replace thrust rings with .005
in. (0.127 mm) oversize rings.
When installing service thrust rings, make sure that grooves cut
on one ring side are facing crankshaft shoulder.
1. Th rust ring
2. Crankshaft
Oil Seals
is advisTwo metal cased spring loaded rubber seals are fitted at both crankshaft ends. Whenever crankshaft is being serviced. it
seals.
oil
able to replace both
101.05
Connecting Rods and Pistons
1.
Page 10-63
omsewewwd
. Piston
Pin
. Big-end cap
Bearings
Cap nut
Connecting rod shank
Cap bolt
. Smell-end bushing
. Circlip
ROD-PlN-PISTON ASSEMBLY
PISTON
CHECKING PISTON CLEARANCE IN CYLINDER BORE AND PIN CLEARANCE IN PISTON
Checking piston clearance in cylinder bore should allow for class selection. Namely, only pistons and bores belonging to same
class should be matched.
Standard pistons are selected in three classes, according to piston bore diameter. The same selection applies to piston pins, which
must be fitted to pistons belonging to same class. The letter and number showing piston class (2] and piston pin bore class (1}
are stamped on underside of piston bosses. Piston pin class is also stamped on pin surface.
1. Piston pin bore class
2. Piston class
3. Matching number of connecting rods to cylinder
Piston pin clearance in boss bore is .0004 to .0007 in. (0.010
to 0.018 mm}.
To check pin fit, lubricate pin with light engine oil and insert
it into piston bore. If fit is correct, pin should slide in by
thumb pressure and when holding piston with pin in vertical
position, pin should not fall from piston under its own weight.
Clearance of pistons in cylinder bores, measured at right angles
to the piston pin and 1.08 in. (27.5 mm) from piston skirt
edge, is .0011 to .0019 in. (0.030 to 0.050 mm).
Be sure to always add piston skirt wear to cylinder wall wear
to determine actuai clearance between parts.
Piston clearance in bore must not exceed .006 in. (0.15 mm).
Oversize pistons are available in three oversizes of .0078 —
.0157 4 .0236 in. (0.2 — 0.4 — 0.6 mm). Oversize pins are
only available in .0078 in. (0.2 mm) oversize.
3.4015 IN. 86 400 MM
' '
3.4035 IN., 86,450 MM
.1562 IN., 3.967 MM
.1570 IN.,l3.98'l MM
.0582 IN.
1.478 MM
.osarm. —
3:]
1.490 MM
.0779 IN.
1.97:; MM
.0733 m.
1.990 MM
5’
.1545m.
J
.2 MM_. _. ._.-..2
.155 m.
I_ —'—---3.937 MM
_
_
27.5 MM
/
.0604 IN., 1.535 MM
.0612 IN., 1.555 MM
.0799 IN., 2.030 MM
.0807 IN., 2.050 MM
1]
‘
D
SPECIFICATIONS OF CYLINDER BORE, PISTON AND RINGS
3.3999
A = 86.360
8
TO 3.4003 IN.
T0 86.370 MM
= 3.4007 T0 3.4011 IN.
86.380 T0 86.390 MM
3.4015
0 = 86.400
T0 3.4019 IN.
T0 86.410 MM
101.05
Connecting Rods and Pistons
,___
Before assembly, check that the four pistons have the same
Weight; maximum permissible tolerance is i .088 02. (i 2.5 g).
If four pistons are not available whose weight comes within
this tolerance, remove metal from base of piston bosses by
milling.
Milling should not be done beyond a depth of .177 in.
(4.5 mm) compared to nominal piston height of 2.232 in.
(56.70 mm] and milling diameter should be limited to 2.775
in. (70.5 mm).
Milling diagram for balancing piston weights.
a = 2.232 in (56.70 mm) nominal piston height.
h = 2.055 in (52.20 mm) minimum height after milling.
c = 2.775 in (70.50 mm) maximum milling diameter.
Piston Ring Side Clearance
Side clearance of piston rings in grooves is checked by installing ring (1) and using feeler gage to measure clearance.
Maximum wear limit is .006 in. (0.15 mm).
2. Piston
3. Feeler gage
Piston ring fit (side clearance for new parts).
—first: compression ring ............ 0.0018 to 0.0030 in
0.045 to 0.077 mm
—second: oil ring ................ 0.0016 to 0.0028 in
0.040 to 0.072 mm
—-third: scraper ring ............... 0.0011 to 0.0024 in
0.030 to 0.062 mm
Ring End Gap
Prior to installing rings on pistons, push them down squarely
into bores and check ring and gap, which should correspond to
values shOWn. If gap is less than specified, grind ring ends as
required. When installing rings on pistons, stagger and gaps
120° apart.
Ring end gap in bore.
-—first: compression ring . . . ......... 0.0118 to 0.0177 in
0.30 to 0.45 mm
wsecond: oil ring ................ 0.0118 to 0.0177 in
0.30 to 0.45 mm
to 0.0157 in
0.0098
.....
..........
ring
—third: scraper
0.25 to 0.40 mm
__
a
l'"— _i!.__
_...
u=a
.. a
c
alls}
if
Checking Piston Weight
1. Ring
Page 10-65
Page 10-66
CONNECTING RODS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SMALL-END BUSHING
Bushing is removed and installed on a suitable press with tool
A.60054, as shown.
1. Drift A.60054
2. Connecting rod
3. Small-end bushing
CONNECTING ROD-PlN-PISTON ASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLY
Check alignment of big-end and small-end axis measured at
4.92 in. (125 mm) from shank. Maximum allowable misalignment is i .004 in. (i 0.10 mml.
1. Square 2. Connecting rod and pin
4. Arbor look
3. Expandable blade arbor
Piston bore is .08 in. (2 mm) offset (2).
Position rod to piston so that number stamped on rod (1 ) faces
towards side of piston bore offset and away from auxiliary
shaft {3}.
1. Connecting rod to cylinder matching number
3. Auxiliarylr shaft
2. Piston pin offset
101.05
Connecting Rods and Pistons
Page 10-67/68
To fit piston pin circlips (3), use tool A.60303 (1) as shown.
After installation, ensure that circlip end gap is not in line with
slot provided in piston, to make removal of circlip easier.
2. Piston
3. Circlip
4. Circlip groove in piston
35089
1. Tool A.60303
Connecting Rod Bearings
if there is evidence of deep scoring or excessive wear, replace
bearing inserts (2).
Check for correct clearance between inserts and crankpins
with "Plastigage" method.
Clean parts thoroughly and connect rods to relative crankpins.
Place length of plastigage wire (11 along crankpin. Install caps
(31 and tighten nuts to 38 ft. lbs. (5.2 kgm) torque.
Remove caps and using scale on envelope (4), measure width
of compressed wire. lf clearance is between .0014 to .0034 in.
(0.036 to 0.086 mm), bearings are fit for service.
1. Plastigage wire
envelope
2. Bearing insert
3. Big-end cap
4. Measuring
CRANKPIN DIAMETERS
If clearance is in excess of_ limits, bearings should be replaced
with undersize bearings.
Crankpins must be reground to an undersize such as to restore
clearance of .0014 to .0034 in. (0.036 to 0.086 mm).
Undersizes
Standard
.01 in
( 0.254 mm)
.04 in
.03 in
.02 in
(0.508 mm) (0.152 mm) (1.015 mm.)
1.7513 in
1.7613 in
1.7713 in
1.7813 in
1.7913 in
(45.498 mm) (45.244 mm) (44.990 mm) (44.736 mm] (44.432 mm)
1.7520 in
1.7620 in
1.7720 in
1.7320 in
1.7920 in
(45.518 mm) (45.264 mm) (46.010 mm) (44.756 mm) (44.502 mm)
CONNECTING ROD BEARING THICKNESSES
Undersizes
Standard
.01 in
(0.254 mm]
.0603 in
.0653 in
.02 in
(0.508 mm)
.0703 in
.04 in
.03 in
(0.762 mm) (1.016 mm)
.0753 in
.0803 in
(1.531 mm) (1.658 mm)
(1.783 mu]
(1.912 mm)
(2.039 mm)
(1.665 mm)
(1.792 mm)
(1.919 mm)
(2.046 mm)
.0606 in
(1.538 mm)
.0656 in
.0706 in
.0756 in
.0806 in
Camshaft Drive
101.06
Page10-69/70
REPLACING TIMING BE LT
(Engine in ear]
renew belt. Under no circumstances
CAUTION: Timing belts cannot be reused. Following belt removal or slackening, always
n.
installatio
initial
its
following
must belt tension be adjusted
cover bolt must be removed from under
Disconnect battery cable. Remove spark plugs. Remove timing belt covers (lower
vehicle).
{7), and cam sprocket mark (ll is aligned
Crank engine with tool A.50459 until pulley mark (3) is aligned with TDC indicator
with mark on belt guard l2).
pulley drive belt (10).
Loosen alternator and NC compressor (if equipped with NO) mounting bolts and remove
place with nut. Remove belt.
Loosen idler pulley nut l4) and move pulley in direction of arrow as far as possible. Secure in
are perfectly coupled with sprockets.
Install new timing belt with slack on tensioner side. Ensure that timing belt teeth
position to 33 ft. lbs. (4.5 kgm}.
Loosen idler pulley nut and tensioner will tighten belt. Torque idler pulley nut in this
Check that timing marks are still correctly aligned.
Reinstall removed components.
HmtM-l
. Camshaft sprocket mark
. Reference mark on timing belt guard
. Crankshaft pulley mark
. Idler pulley nut
. Auxiliary shaft sprocket bolt
. Camshaft sprocket bolt
.TDC timing mark
8. Auxiliary shaft sprocket
9. Timing belt
10. Pulley drive belt
101.07
Valve Mechanism
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Seal
Dowel
Plates for adjusting valve clearance
Tappets
Locks
Upper cups
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
inner springs
Outer springs
Lower cups
Exhaust valve guide
Exhaust valve
Flat washers
VALVE M ECH AN ISM COMPONENTS
CAMSHAFT HOUSING
Check that camshaft bores in housing are not out-of-round.
Inner surfaces should be smooth and show no signs of seizure;
if they do, replace housing.
NOTE: When servicing camshaft it is advisable to replace
driveend seal.
CAMSHAFT
Camshaft journal and lobe surfaces should be absolutely
smooth and in perfect condition. Should traces of seizure or
scoring be found which cannot be dressed off with an extrafine abrasive stone, camshaft is not fit for further service and
should be replaced.
Make sure journal oil holes are not stopped up. To remove
camshaft welch plug, use a standard punch; for reassembly
use installer A.86013 (1).
1. Installer A.86018
Page 10-71
13.
14.
15.
16.
Intake valve
Intake valve guide
Oil seal
Camshaft
17. Welch plug
Page 10-72
|
Rest camshaft on two parallel blocks placed on a surface plate,
and check with a dial gage that center journal (1) runout does
not exceed .008 in. (0.2 mm). Also check that lobe height (2)
is 0.362 in. (9.2 mm) for intake and 0.364 in. (9.25 mm) for
exhaust lobes.
1. Center journal
2. Cam lobe
1.9047 lN., 48,380 MM
1.9057 lN., 481405 MM
1.8988 lN., 48,180 MM
1.8978 lN., 48,205 MM
/
1.8890 lN., 47,980 MM 1.1807 lN., 29,989 MM
1.8900 lN., 48,005 MM 1.1816 lN., 30,014 MM
/
L/ .
O
1.9128 lN., 48,580 MM
1.9139 lN., 48,805 MM
1.9114 lN.,48,550 MM
1.9108 lN., 48.535 MM
1.9035 lN., 48,350 MM
1.9030 ”11., 48,335 MM
1.8957 lN., 48,150 MM
1.8951 lN., 48,135 MM
1.88781N.,47,950 MM
1.8872 lN., 47,935 MM
1.1795 lN., 29,960 MM
1.1787 lN., 29,944 MM
SPECIFICATIONS OF CAMSHAFT AND BORES IN HOUSING
TAPPETS AND PLATES
Make sure tappet plate surface in contact with camshaft lobes
is glass-like and shows no signs of dishing or pitting. Minor
imperfections can be removed using an extra fine abrasive
stone.
Tappet outside surfaces, as well as tappet bores in camshaft
housing, should not show evidence of undue wear, taper of
scoring.
ll
Check tappet diameter and tappet bore diameter in camshaft
housing using micrometers. Values read on micrometers should
meet specifications as shOWn. If they do not, replace worn
parts.
Tapper plates are available for service in a range of thickness
from .1457 to .1850 in. (3.70 to 4.70 mm) with .002 in.
{0.05 mm] increments.
1:
11557111.,37300 1111
11577 lN., 31.025911
1.4557 111,311,975 1111
1.4565 11,35,995 11111
""
Valve Mechanism
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING VALVE CLEARANCE
Adjustment of clearanca between camshaft lobes and tappets
does not require camshaft removal.
Correct clearance with engine cold is: intake valves — .011 to
.014 in. (.24 to .32 mm) and exhaust valves — .015 to .018 in.
(.34 to .42 mm).
Remove camshaft cover.
Turn crankshaft until lobe (1) controlling tappet (3) being
checked is pointing upwards and is at right angles to tappet
plate (2).
Using a feeler gage (4), measure clearance between tappet plate
and camshaft lobe to determine if plate has become worn.
1. Lobe
2. Plate
3. Tappet
4. Fealer gage
NOTE: Remove oil from around tappets with syringe to
simplify plate removal. Empty syringe into oil drain passages.
If clearance is not as specified, insert tool A.60421 (3) on both
intake and exhaust valve tappets (2). Remove plate (1) from
its seat on tappet using pincer A.87001.
After determining needed thickness, install new plate.
Tappet clearance plates are available for service in a range of
thicknesses from .1457 to .1850 in. (3.70 to 4.70 mm) with a
difference between each of .002 in. (0.05 mm). The thickness
of plate is shown on one of the plates flat surfaces and this
should be assembled towards tappet.
Valve Timing Diagram for a Theoretical Tappet Clearance of:
— 0.60 mm, inlet valves
—- 0.65 mm, exhaust valves
101.07
Page 10.73/74
Auxiliary Drives
REPLACING AND ADJUSTING DRIVE BELTS
Vehicles With Air Pump, Without A.C.
To replace drive belts, loosen alternator mount bolts. Remove
belt (6). Loosen air pump (3) mount bolts. Remove belt (1).
install new belt on water pump (4) and air pump (3). Fully
tighten air pump belt (1) and air pump mount bolts. Check for
about '19 inch belt deflection with moderate finger pressure.
install new belt (6) on crankshaft pulley (5), water pump
pulley (8), and alternator pulley (7). Fully tighten belt (6) and
alternator mount bolts. Check for about ‘A inch belt deflection
with moderate finger pressure.
1. Air pump belt
2. Air pump pulley
5. Crankshaft pulley
pulley
3. Air pump
6. Alternator/water pump belt
8. Water pump pulley
4. Water pump
7. Alternator
Vehicles With Air Pump and A.C.
To remove compressor belt (6), loosen both compressor and
alternator mount bolts. Remove belt (6).
To remove alternator water pump belt (8), remove belt (6) and
then belt (8).
To remove air pump belt (1), loosen both air pump (3) and
alternator. Remove belt (8) from water pump (4) and then
remove belt ( 1).
After installing new belts, adiust tension on compressor belt
(6) first, if necessary. Adjust tension on belt (8) second and
the air pump belt (1).
Belt Tension
A.C. compressor belt (6)
Alternatoriwater pump belt (8)
Air pump belt (1)
Lb.
90-110
75-95
About 1/8 inch deflection
with moderate finger pressure
Run engine for 15 minutes with air conditioning on. Readjust
belts.
A.C. compressor belt (6) to 70 to 90 lbs.
Alternator/water pump belt (8) to 50 to 65 lbs.
1. Air pump belt 2. Air pump pulley 3. Air pump 4. Water pump
5. Crankshaft pulley 6. Compressor belt 7. Compressor clutch
B. Altematorlwatar pump belt 9. Alternator pulley
Vehicles Without Air Pump and A.C.
To remove alternator/water pump belt (1), loosen alternator
(6) mount bolts.
Install new belt (1) and fully tighten belt and alternator mount
bolts. Check for about V; inch belt deflection with moderate
finger pressure.
1. Alternator/mater pump belt 2. Water pump pulley 3. Water pump
4. Crankshaft pulley 5. Alternator pulley 6. Alternator
101.15
Page 10-75
Page 10-76
Vehicles With Fuel Injection and A.C.
To remove belts, loosen three nuts (3) and remove water pump
belt [2].
Install new compressor belt. Install compressor lower mount
bolt. Adjust belt tension to 70 to 90 lbs. and fully tighten
compressor bolts.
To install water pump belt (2) loosely slip alternator belt (7)
over inner groove of water pump pulley (1).
Remove nuts (3) holding crankshaft outer pulley half {12) and
remove pulley half.
CAUTION: Shims will be re-used. Do not discard shims.
Install water pump belt (2) over outer groove of water pump
pulley {11) and crankshaft pulley.
Install original shims and reinstall crankshaft pulley half.
Check that water pump belt tension is 60 to 80 lbs.
If it is necessary to readjust belt tension, a shim change of 0.5
mm (0.020 in.) causes a change in belt tension of 17 to 22 lbs.
Fully tighten nuts (3).
If replacing alternator belt (7), remove water pump belt (2).
Loosen alternator tensioner bolt (8) and remove belt.
Install new belt and adjust tension to 3D to 50 lbs. Fully tighten
alternator bolts. Install water pump belt as directed above.
1. A.C.. compressor belt
2. Water pump belt
3. Nuts
4. Shims
5. Crankshaft pulley assembly
6. Water pump
1‘. Alternator belt
8. Tensioner bolt
9. Alternator
10. Compressor
11 . Water pump pulley
12. Crankshaft pulley half
A
If replacing A.C. compressor belt (1), loosen compressor
tension bolt and remove lower mount bolt. Slide compressor
toward crankshaft pulley and remove belt (1).
102.01
Fuel Tank and Lines
Page 10-77
3
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carburetor
Charcoal canister
Separator
Fuel tank
5. Separator
6. Two-way valve
%
'
_
_
'
''
. _
FUEL VAPOR LINES
_
'
'
(VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR)
.
_
_
_
‘
‘
@
='\
Page 10-78
1. Air intake
2. Charcoal mnister
3. Two-way valve
4. Separator
5. Fuel tank
6. Separator
7. Twomy safety relief valve
8. "Y" connector
9. Air supply hose
FUEL VAPOR LINES
(VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION)
Fuel Tank and Lines
102.01
Page 10—79
#ommymmt—u
. Filler lines
. Rubber ring
. Check valve
. Carburetor
_ Fuel filter
, Fuel pump
Check valve
Gasket
dd
. Sending unit
00m
VEHICLES WITH CAHBURETOR
ommum5n¢mna
. Sanding uni1
. Gasket
. Rubber ring
. Filler lines
Fuel tank
. Fuel filter
. Fuel pressure regulator
. Fuel manifold
d
, Fuel pump
. Brackets
VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION
FUEL TANK AND. LINES
. Fuel tank
. Brackets
FUEL TANK
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Empty all fuel from fuel tank.
0n vehicles with fuel injection, disconnect air hoses from
both sides of air flow sensor. Disconnect electrical connector
from sensor.
Remove two nuts and two bolts holding sensor bracket to
firewall. Remove bracket with air flow sensor attached and
set to one side.
Cut hose clamps and disconnect two fuel hoses (lllcerburetor
vehicles only) and two vapor hoses (5).
Remove four screws (2 and 3) holding rubber cover (4) and
remove cover.
Disconnect three wires from sending unit assembly.
1. Fuel hoses
2. Screw
3. Screw
4. Cover
5. Vapor hoses
Raise and support rear of vehicle.
On vehicles with fuel injection, remove protective cover and
fuel inlet and return hoses (1).
On all vehicles. support fuel tank (5) and remove bolts (3 and 6)
and support straps i2 and 4). Lower tank from vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1.Fue|hoses
6.Bolts
2.5upportstrap
3. Bolt
4. Supportstrap
5.Fueltank
Fuel Pump and Lines
102.02
Page 10-81
FUEL PUMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
[Vehicles With Carburetor)
Disconnect and plug fuel hoses (1).
Remove two nuts (2) and washers holding fuel pump (3) to
engine.
Remove fuel pump. two gaskets and insulating support.
Installation is reverse or removal.
1. Fuel hose
2. Nuts
3. Fuel pump
INSPECTION
Check attachment screws (4) of upper and lower bodies and
cover screw (1) for tightness.
Ensure fuel hoses and filter are not deteriorated or clogged
and that diaphragm is not hardened or cracked.
Check for weakness or distortion of control lever and diaphragm springs.
When assembling, cost control lever and pivot with oil. Use
new gaskets lightly coated with grease.
1. Cover screw 2. Lockwasher
3. Cover 4. Screw 5. Filter
6. Upper body 7. Diaphragm 8. Spacer 9. Spring
11. Pivot pin 12. Control lever 13. Spring
10. Lower body
ADJUSTMENT
Place outer gasket (2) and insulating support (4) on engine.
Place a .012 in. (.3 mm) gasket on support. Install rod (5) in
engine.
Check that dimension A is .59-.61 in. (15-155 mm). Install
a thicker or thinner gasket to meet this dimension.
After adjusting the dimension, place inner gasket (3). insulating support and outer gasket on engine.
Install rod (5) in engine, and install fuel pump (1).
NOTE: Gaskets (3) are supplied in .12. .027, and .047 in.
(.3, .7. and 1.2 mm) thicknesses.
1. Fuel pump 2. Gasket
3. Gasket
4. Insulating support
5. Rod
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
_(Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
--._.-
CAUTION: Relieve fuel system pressure before disconnect-
ing fuel hoses. Refer to RELIEVING FUEL PRES-
SURE in Section 102.26.
Raise and support rear of vehicle.
Remove panel protecting fuel pump.
Disconnect and plug fuel hoses (1). Disconnect electrical
leads (4) from fuel pump (3).
Remove two nuts (2) retaining fuel pump and remove pump.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Fuel hoses
2. Nuts
3. Fuel pump
4. Electrical leads
FUEL FILTER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles with Carburetor)
Disconnect fuel inlet (1) and outlet (5) hoses from filter by
removing clamps (2 and 4) and pulling hoses off filter (3).
install new filter with arrow on filter pointing in direction of
fuel flow to carburetor.
1. Fuel inlet hose 2. Clamp
5. Fuel outlet hose
3. Fuel filter
4. Clamp
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
CAUTION: Reiieve fuel svstem pressure before disconnect-
ing fuel hoses. Refer to RELIEVING FUEL PRES-
SURE in Section 102.26.
Disconnect fuel inlet (3) and outlet (5) hoses from filter by
removing clamps (1) and pulling hoses off filter (2).
Remove two nuts (4) holding fuel filter to body, and remove
fuel filter.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1.Clamp
2.Fualfilter
3. Fuel iniethose
4. Nut
5.Fueloutlethose
Carburetor and Air Cleaner
102.04
Page 10-83
AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Carburetor)
Loosen clamp (1) holding fresh air duct (2) to fan.
Disconnect hoses (5) from side at air cleaner (3). Remove
three nuts (4) and washers holding cover (6) on air cleaner.
Remove filter element.
Remove four nuts holding air cleaner on carburetor. Lift air
cleaner and disconnect hose from bottom. Remove air cleaner
with fresh air duct attached.
Installation is reverse of removal. Make sure metal bushings
are installed in rubber spacer.
1. Clamp
2. Duct
3. Air cleaner
5. Hose
4. Nut
6. Cover
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
Loosen clamps (2) and remove air supply hose (1 ).
To remove filter element. remove wing nut (6) and top of air
cleaner.
Remove two nuts (3 and 5) holding air cleaner assembly (4)
to body and firewall. Remove air cleaner assembly.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Air supply hose
5. Nut
6. Wing nut
2. Clamps
3. Nut
4. Air cleaner assembly
CARBURETOR COOLING FAN
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove four screws (3 and 5) holding fan duct to fan mount~
ing plate.
Separate duct from mounting plate with duct hose (2) attached
and set to one side.
Disconnect wire at connector.
Remove four nuts (1 and 4) holding mounting plate to body
and remove fan assembly.
install in reverSe order. Make sure ground wire is installed
under mounting nut.
1. Nut
2. Duct hose 3. Screws 4. Nut
5. Screws
CARBURETOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Mark lines. hoses. and wires prior to removal to identify
for installation.
Remove air cleaner.
From carburetor. disconnect fuel inlet and return hoses (4),
charcoal canister hose (2), and all remaining vacuum and
coolant hoses.
Disconnect three electrical connectors (1) from carburetor.
Disconnect throttle linkage (Slat carburetor.
Remove four nuts (3) holding carburetor. Remove carburetor
and spacer.
Installation is reverse of removal. Connect vacuum, fuel and
water lines to connections as shown below.
1. Electrical connectors
5. Throttle linkage
2. Hose
3. Nut
4. Fuel hose
F LOAT BOW L
VAPOR OUTLET
COOLANT
HOSE CONNECTION
VACUUM ACCELERATOR
PUMP
CONNECTION
FUEL
INLET
CONNECTION
FUEL RETURN
CONNECTION
CHARCOAL TRAP
PURGE CONNECTION
A.C. FAST
IDLE CONNECTION
EGR SIGNAL
CONNECTION
DISTRIBUTOR SIGNAL
CONNECTION
CRANKCASE VENT
CONNECTION
POWER VALVE
CONNECTION
102.04
Carburetor and Air Cleaner
Page 10—85
.x \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\“
AUTOMATIC CHOKE
CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT
Remove carburetor from vehicle. Remove three screws holding
automatic choke cover and gasket.
.
‘.
‘o.
4
Choke Fest Idle
Set fast idle screw (2) on second step of cam (1). Check that
primary throttle opening (gap A) is 0.033 to 0.037 in. (0.85
to 0.95 mm). If gap A is not correct. adjust screw (2).
..o o
t‘. \ \\\\\\\\\\\\\\\“‘
1. Fast idle earn 2. Fast idle adjustment screw
3. Primary throttle plate
Choke Unloeder Lever Clearance
Release
Pull fast idle linkage (2) back. Close choke plate (1).
linkage (2). Measure gap B between (ever (4) and shoulder of
type can
bushing (3). A spark plug gap gage of the bent wire
be used.
is
Gap should be 0.012 to 0.039 in. (0.3 to 1.0 mm). If gap
not correct, carefully bend tang (4).
‘
—
1. Choke plate
2. Festldlelinkage
3. Spring
4. Tang
5-1
1—_
I [Ill],
I,
”11¢ .11.'a
.”
9:
I
f o'1'1111
O
I ’15-"
Check that gap C is 0.098 to 0.118 in. (2.5 to 3.0 mm). If
1. Choke plate
2. Fast idle screw
3. Fast idle com
s‘
gap C is not correct, bend lever (4).
4. Lever
‘0
‘-
in direction of arrow.
s“.‘
Set screw (2) on third step of cam (3). Make sure screw is in
proper contact with third step. If necessary, move earn (3)
#1“‘\\\\‘\\\‘\\\\\‘
Fast ldle Cam Intermediate Setting
Page 10-86
Choke Unloader Minimum Opening
With linkage (3) on second step of cam (2), position tool
No. 4460 on rod (7). Push tool to left until rod contacts stop
screw (6). Hold it there.
NOTE: Make sure tool is not touching bushing (5) in housing.
This would restrict travel of rod (7).
Measure gap D. Gap should be 0.128 to 0.147 in. (3.25 to
3.75 mm). if gap is not correct, adjust travel of rod (7) by
turning screw (6). Clockwise to decrease gap-counterclockwise
to increase gap.
1. Choke plate 2. Fast idle cam 3. Fast idlelinkege
4. Tool No.4460 5. Bushing 6. Stop screw 7. Fiod
F LOAT LEVE L ADJUSTMENT
Remove six screws holding carburetor top cover. Carefully
remove coverlfloat assembly and gasket.
Check that needle valve seat (2) is tight in cover. Check that
float (9) is free of dents or punctures. Check that float can
move freely on hinges.
Hold dual float assembly in vertical position with needle valve
lightly seated. Measure distance A between each float and
cover gasket. Distance should be .266 to .285 in. (6.75 to
7.25 mm). Make sure floats are same distance from gasket. if
not, bend float arm (8). Then if float assembly is not at specified
distance, carefully bend tang (7) to obtain adjustment.
To obtain float drop distance B of 0.354 in. (9 mm), bend
lug (3).
Carefully replace cover/float assembly and secure with six
screws.
1. Caboretor cover 2. Needle valve seat 3. Float drop lug
4 Needle verve 5. Return hook 6. Damper ball 7. Float tank
8. Floatarm 9. Float 10. Gasket
CARBUFIETOR ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: For proper specifications, always refer to EPA Conformity Tag in engine compartment.
Apply hand brake. Start engine and allow warm up. Insert CO
tester probe in tailpipe. Connect a tachometer.
On vehicles without air pump, pinch off—the supply line to
reed valve. On vehicles with air pump, pinch off air injection
supply line upstream of check valve.
Adjust carburetor idle speed adjusting screw (1) to set engine
speed to 800 to 900 rpm.
Adjust idle mixture adjusting screw (2) to set CO to 2.0%. Turn
screw clockwise to decrease C0 or counter-clockwise to increase CO.
Recheck idle speed and if necessary, repeat adjusting idle
speed and mixture to obtain both the proper idle speed and
CO reading. Shut engine off. Remove tool used to pinch off
air injection hose or supply line.
1. Idle speed adjusting screw
2. idle mixture adjusting screw
102.04
Carburetor and Air Cleaner
29. Primary throttle plate
30. Primary throttle shaft
1. Carburetor cover
2. Breather valve
31. Accelerator pump actuating cam
3. Choke plate
32. Fast idle control lever lA/C only)
33. Power valve cover
4. Gasket
5. Choke linkage
6. Choke plate shaft
7. Filter
8. Float assy
34. Bowl vent valve rod
35. Power valve return spring
36. Power valve diaphragm
.
37. Accelerator pump jet
.f
9. Center venturi
10. Idle jet housing
}
12. Secondary throttle vacuum diaphragm assy
13. Secondary throttle shaft
14. Secondary throttle plate
l
l
5
38. Main fuel jet
39. Main emulsion tube
l
11. Idle jet
40. Main air jet
41. Vacuum accelerator pump cover
42. Vacuum accelerator pump return spring
43. Vacuum accelerator pump diaphragm
44. Automatic choke hot water cover
45. Gasket
15. Throttle actuating lever assembly
16. Choke fast idle screw
17. Progressive throttle linkage
18. Return spring
19. Stop lever, Primary shaft
46. Automatic choke hot water backing plate
47. Bimetallic spring case
48. Gasket
20. Return spring
3
22. Idle speed screw
23. Fast idle diaphragm assy (A/C only)
1
‘
21. Carburetor body assy
24. ldle shut off solenoid
25. Idle mixture screw
1‘
49. Automatic choke assy
I
'
52. Choke unloader return spring
53. Choke unloader diaphragm
50. Choke unloader adjustment screw
51. Choke unloader cover
54. Fast idle cam return spring
55. Needle valve assy
26. Accelerator pump cover
27. Pump diaphragm
28. Diaphragm return spring
Specifications (mm)
j
Carburetor Model
21
Primary venturi
4.00
Main fuel jet (primary)
A/C Vehicle
only
.
‘ ’.
'
Main fuel jet (secondary)
ldle jet (primary)
Idle jet (secondary)
Accelerator pump jet
Air jet (primary)
Air jet (secondary)
'
Emulsion tube (primary)
Emulsion tube (secondary)
Needle valve
)/279
l 21
'
22
4.00
'
4.00
1.05
1
1.05
22
Secondary venturi
.’ .
7/179
Primary throat
Secondary throat
.
Page 10-87/88
§ 4.00
10/179
21
22
10/279
7/1 80
7/280
22
22
22
21
21
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
4.00
1.10
1.10
1.05
.1 4.00
21
4.00
4.00
1.05
1.10
0.50
0.05
(
1
l
1.10
0.50
0.50
1.05
0.50
0.50
1.05
0.50
0.50
1.05
0.50
0.50
1.05
0.50
0.50
2.50
l
2.50
2.40
2.40
2.30
2.30
F25
F30
1.75
1
F25
F30
1.75
0.50
1.75
g 0.50
‘j 1.75
0.50
1.70
F25
F30
1.75
0.50
1.70
F25
F30
1.75
WEBER 28/30' DHTA CARBURETOR
0.50
1.80
F25
F30
1.75
0.50
1.80
F25
F30
1.75
Accelerator Linkage
dddfl
uudopmummywne
. Bushing
. Spring
. Awelerator table
Clip
. Support
. Cable end
. Clip
. Bellcrank
Lever
. Throttle rod
. Carburetor
. Pedal cover
. Accelerator pedal
upwewewpe
. Bushing
Spring
.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Accelerator ceble
Clip
Support
Cable end
Clip
Plate
Bellcrenk
Support
Stop bolt
Lever
Throttle cable
Throttle housing
15. Lever
16. Pedal cover
17. Accelerator pedal
102.21
Page 10—89/90
,..
Fuel Injection System
102.26
Page 10-91
FUEL SYSTEM
The fuel system consists of:
0 Fuel tank
0 Fuel pump
0 Fuel filter
0 Fuel manifold
0 Pressure regulator
O Injectors
0 Cold start valve
FUEL FILTER
FUEL TANK
FUEL RETURN LINE
FUEL MANIFOLD
FUEL PUMP
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
COLD START
VALVE
FUE L PRESSURE
REGULATOR
FUEL SUPPLY LINE
FUEL INJECTORS
RETAINERS
Page 10-92
AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
The air intake system consists of:
0 Vacuum signal for fuel pressure regulator
0 Air filter
0 Air flow sensor
0 Bypass channel for air conditioning
0 Auxiliary air regulator
Am
CONDITIONER
INTAKE
MANIFOLD
POWER
COLD START
E:
i
PRESSURE
l? III E
LE
REGULATOR
CARBON
/ CANISTER
FUEL MANIFOLD
:
\
Cl,
AC IDLE
STEP UP ELECTRO
VALVE
AIR FILTER
lessees
' )
FUEL
DISTRIBUTOR
VACUUM
J
AUXILIARY
AIR REGULATOR
—U—-I.I-I.I—“
AIR FLOW
SENSOR
NOTE: Air leaking into the system after the air flow sensor will not be sensed. This will result in a
wrong fuel/air mixture and will affect engine operation.
102.26
Fuel Injection System
Page 10—93
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The electrical system consists of:
I Relay set
0 Electronic control unit
I Throttle plate switch
0 Air temperature sensor
0 Battery
0 Ignition switch cranking position
0 Inline fuse
0 Coolant temperature sensor
0 Air flow sensor
0 Cold start valve and thermo time switch circuit
In addition to the fuel injection electrical system, the following items are used:
0 Ignition coil
1 HIGH ALTITUDE
"1—
\ i Iggg'ifgggé l
.,
| \
I“
a:
1':
1
i
-;
.
AUXILIARV
AIR REGULATOR
45
15
mfg”
SWITCH
">
2' >
2=>
35>
1/
A—lan
i
"
I2)..—.
.
4‘
H,
45
mi COLD START
3 VALVE
(.54.
:- 4
:>< ’
“T
———>‘<°‘°€"
3.4.5“
4'—
mt
«
?(
"’
D ‘
m)—
I
iii 9%.
5‘
l
T
2! \
All
I
”(—
Am
FLOW
SENsOR
IE>
.1)
>96: F
’ ’
I
FUSE ’°,0
finch—r
n
RELAY SET
i BATTERY
-.
29
Is).
A
30)
I5
A
3' INJECTOR
FUEL
pump
(5
‘
?
’ .
2 >
a)
3 >
ll
3 (.l—g"
THROTTLE
PLATE
SWITCH
IS“
{I3
, x
A
u)
. I
‘1’
-Il-<
.—
Pill,
I
.
I
‘ ' ‘—
_ _______________________ .
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
[—
«4—4?
l '
4: LAMBDA
- SENSOR
IGNITION
SWITCH
\No—Ma: )-
9 a as
26)
24>-
COIL
r
an:
Page 10-94
RELIEVING FUEL PRESSURE
CAUTION: Relieve fuel system pressure before disconnecting fuel lines.
Remove vacuum hose (3) from fuel pressure regulator (2).
Connect vacuum pump (1) to regulator (2). Pump vacuum up
to 20 inches.
1. Vacuum pump
2. Pressure regulator
3. Vacuum hose
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
NOTE: Use this check to determine if fuel pump is operating
properly and to check for restrictions in fuel lines.
Relieve fuel system pressure as directed in above procedure.
Provide a container to catch any fuel. Use caution to prevent
any dirt from entering system.
Loosen clamp holding fuel hose (3) to cold start valve (1).
off valve.
CAUTION: Use care in pulling hose off valve. Valve body
is plastic.
Connect "Y" fitting (2) on gauge assembly A.95874 (4) to
fuel hose. Secure hose with clamp.
Connect hose on gauge assembly to cold start valve. Secure
hose with clamp.
Disconnect vacuum hose from fuel pressure regulator. Disconnect hose from airflow sensor.
With ignition key switched to ”MAR" (on) position, move air
flow sensor until fuel pump is energized. Check pressure
reading. Pressure should be 33 to 39 psi (23 to 2.7 bar).
Start engine and operate at idle.
Connect vacuum hose to pressure regulator. Check pressure
reading. Pressure should be approximately 28 psi (2 bar).
Relieve fuel system pressure. Remove gauge assembly and
reconnect hoses.
NOTE: Fuel pump output pressure is 39-45 psi (2.7 to3.2 bar).
To check pressure, connect gauge directly to fuel
supply line. Leave remainder of system disconnected.
3
1. Cold start valve
2. "Y” fitting
3. Fuel hose 4. Gauge assembly
Fuel Injection System
102.26
Page 10-95
IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Engine must be at normal operating temperature
with cooling fan off when adjusting idle Speed.
Connect tachometer. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
Adjust idle speed adjustment screw (1) to obtain 800 to 900
RPM.
1. Idle Speed adjustment screw
MIXTURE CHECKING AND ADJUSTMENT
To check mixture, first connect test equipment as follows:
Remove plug (1) from C0 pickup fitting. Install adapter probe
4467 in pickup. Connect hose from CO analyzer to probe.
Turn analyzer on to allow for proper warmup of equipment.
Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature.
NOTE: Engine is at normal Operating temperature when
cooling fan has been on twice.
1. Plug
Zero analyzer amording to manufacturer's instructions.
Disconnect harness wire (1) from Lambda sensor connector
(2). making sure that wire cannot ground out.
Check CO reading. Reading should be 0.5% to 0.9%.
1. Lambda sensor harness wire
2. Lambda sensor connector
Page 10-96
To adjust mixture. proceed as follows:
NOTE: On 1981 and later models, Federal law prohibits
routine adjustment of mixture. Adjust mixture only
if major engine repairs have been performed or main
fuel injection components have been replaced.
If mixture screw is concealed by a plastic plug, remove plug.
if mixture screw is concealed by an aluminum plug, refer to
MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT SCREW PLUG REMOVAL AND
INSTALLATION betore performing this procedure.
Turn adjustment screw clockwise to increase CO level, and
counterclockwise to decrease CO level.
install plug in air flow sensor (1).
WARNING: In the next step. be very careful in removing
probe and installing plug. Exhaust pipe could
be very hot.
Remove CO analyzer, remove probe. and install plug in exhaust pickup.
1. Air flow sensor
2. Screwdriver
MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT SCREW PLUG
REMOVAL
NOTE: On 1981 and later models. Federal law prohibits
routine adjustment of mixture. Remove aluminum
adjustment screw plug to adjust mixture only if major
engine repairs have been performed or main fuel
injection components have been replaced.
Center punch aluminum plug [1) sealing mixture adjustment
screw in the air flow sensor (2).
Drill a 3/32 in. (2.5 mm) hole, approximately 9/64 to 5/32 in.
[3.5 to 4 mm} deep. in the center of plug.
NOTE: Clean all metal shavings from around area.
1.Aluminum plug
2. Air flow sensor
3. 3/32 in. (2.5 mm) drill
Screw a 1/8 in. (3 mm) sheet metal screw(1)into drilled hole.
Grasp the screw with a pair of pliers and lift screw and aluminum plug (2) out from air flow sensor.
1. Va in. {3 mm] screw 2. Aluminum plug
.‘
Fuel Injection System
INSTALLATION
NOTE: To comply with Federal law. replacement plug must
be installed after mixture adjustment.
Seat new replacement plug (1) in recess of air flow sensor
(2). Use a hammer to drive plug in flush with unit.
1. Plug
2. Air flow sensor
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Working behind passenger's seat. remove spare tire cover
and spare tire.
Push in clip holding electrical Connector (1) to electronic
control unit (2), and unplug connector from unit.
Remove two nuts (3) holding control unit to body. and remove control unit.
Install in reverse order.
1. Electrical connector
2. Electronic control unit
3. Nut
FUEL INJECTOR COOLING FAN
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Loosen clamp (1) holding fresh air duct (2) to fan duct.
Disconnect wire (3) at connector.
Remove four bolts (5 and 6) holding fan mounting plate (4)
to body and remove fan assembly.
Install in reverse order. Make sure ground wire is installed
under mounting bolt.
1. Clamp 2. Fresh air duct
6. Bolt
3. Wire 4. Mounting plate
5. Bolt
102.26
Page 10-98
LAMBDA SENSOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: The Lambda sensor must be replaced every 30.000
miles.
Allow exhaust system to cool.
Disconnect cable (2) from sensor (1).
Remove sensor from exhaust pipe (3).
1. Lambda sensor
2. Cable
3, Exhaust pipe
Coat threads of new Lambda sensor with anti-seize, antr-
rust grease.
CAUTION: Do not allow grease to get on sensor surface.
This will contaminate sensor and require re-
APPLY ANTI-SEIZE
COMPOUND HERE
placement.
Thread sensor into exhaust pipe. Torque sensor to 30 to 36
ft. lbs. (4.2 to 5.0 mkg).
Connect cable to sensor.
M\
_//""
INDICATOR RESET
NOTE: Lambda sensor indicator comes on at 30.000 miles
to indicate replacement of sensor. To turn indicator
off, the switch unit must be reset.
Working from passenger's side footwell, reach behind center
console {3} to gain access to switch unit (1).
Remove wire securing cap screw (2). Remove cap screw.
Insert a small screw driver through housing and press on
switch contact. Contact will reset to high point on wheel.
install cap screw. Secure screw with new wire.
1. Switch unit
2. Cap screw
3. Center console
DO NOT
_ APPLY HERE
Fuel Injection System
THROTTLE PLATE SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect electrical connector to throttle plate switch.
Remove two screws (1) and washers holding switch (2) to
throttle housing (3).
Remove switch by slowly pulling switch out from housing.
Install in reverse order. making sure switch is pmperly aligned
with throttle shaft (4).
l. Screws
2. Switch
3. Throttle housing
4. Throttle shaft
ADJUSTMENT
Make sure idle speed is correct.
Disconnect
electrical connector from throttle plate switch.
Connect an ohmmeter between terminals 2 and 18 of the
throttle plate switch.
Loosen two screws (1 ) holding throttle plate switch (3) to throttle
housing (2).
With engine oil, rotate switch clockwise until ohmmeter indicates a closed circuit.
At the exact point the ohmmeter indicates a closed circuit.
tighten the two screws holding switch.
Recheck the adjustment and replace the connector to the
throttle plate switch.
1. Screws
2. Throttle housing
3. Throttle plate switch
102.26
Page 10-99
Page ‘I 0- 1 00
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Relieve fuel pressure as directed under RELIEVING FUEL
PRESSURE.
Provide a container to catch any fuel. Use care to prevent
any dirt from entering system.
Disconnect vacuum hose (2) and fuel return hose (6) from
pressure regulator (3).
Disconnect fuel manifold connection (1 I from pressure regulator.
Remove nut I5) holding regulator to fuel manifold. Remove
pressure regulator.
Install in reverse order. Check all fuel connections for leaks.
1. Fuel manifold 2. Vacuum hose
5. Nut 6. Fuel return hose
3. Pressure regulator
4. Bolt
COLD START VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Relieve fuel pressure as directed under RELIEVING FUEL
PRESSURE.
Provide a container to catch any fuel. Use care to prevent any
dirt from entering system.
Disconnect electrical connector [3) from cold start valve (1).
Remove clamp (6} holding fuel hose (5) on valve. Pull fuel
hose off valve.
CAUTION: Use care in pulling fuel hose off valve. Valve
body is plastic.
Using a 5_mm Allen wrench, remove two screws (2 and 6)
holding valve in intake manifold (7). Remove valve and ”O”
ring {3).
Install in reverse order. Make sure fuel hose is completely
installed on valve and hose clamp is tight.
Check fuel connections for leaks.
8, “O" ring
AUXILIARY AIR REGULATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect regulator air hose from intake manifold near cold
start valve.
Disconnect regulator air hose and charcoal canister hose
from fitting in bottom of main air supply hose.
Disconnect electrical connector (1} from regulator {8).
Using a 5 mm Allen wrench, remove two bolts (4) and washers
holding regulator to cylinder block. Remove regulator with
hoses (2 and 6) attached. and remove hoses from regulator.
Install in reverse order. Make sure air hose connections are
tight and that clip (5) is installed under clamps on regulator.
1. Electrical connector
6. Air hose 7. Clamp
2. Air hose 3. Clamp 4. Allen bolt
8. Auxiliary air regulator
1. Cold start valve 2. Allen screw 3. Electrical connector
4. Allen screw 5. Fuel hose 6. Clamp 7. Intake manifold
5. Clip
1
I
Fuel Injection System
y
AIR FLOW SENSOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
!
Disconnect both air hoses from each side of air flow sensor (1 ).
|
Disconnect electrical connector from sensor.
|
Remove bolt (2) and lockwasher holding clamp (3) to bracket
(5). Remove clamp and spacer (8).
Remove two bolts (7) Iockwashers, washers. and bushings (6)
holding air flow sensor to bracket. Be careful not to drop washers
on either side of rubber bushing under front side of sensor.
Install in reverse order. making sure rubber bushing is installed
under sensor and air hose connections are tight.
I
1. Air flow sensor
5. Bracket
2. Bolt
6. Bushings
3, Mounting clamp
4. Bushing
7. Bolts 8. Spacer
FUEL INJECTORS
REMOVAL
Relieve fuel system pressure as directed under RELIEVlNG
FUEL PRESSURE.
Provide a container to catch any fuel. Use care to prevent any
dirt from entering system.
NOTE: Before disconnecting any fuel hoses, place a rag
beneath them to catch any spilled fuel.
Disconnect the following: Fuel supply hose (2) from tube.
fuel return hose (5) from pressure regulator (7). vacuum hose
{6) from pressure regulator, fuel hose from cold start valve (1 ),
and main air supply hose (3) from throttle housing (4).
CAUTION: Use care in pulling fuel hose off of cold start
valve. Valve body is plastic.
1. Cold start valve 2. Fuel supply hose 3. Main air supply hose
4. Throttle housing 5. Fuel return hose 6. Vacuum hose
7. F ual pressure regulator
Disconnect the following: accelerator cable (1) from linkage.
electrical connectors from throttle plate switch (2) and cold
start valve (4), auxiliary air regulator hose (5) from intake mani—
fold, and crankcase evaporative bypass hose (3) from intake
manifold.
Remove two bolts (6) holding fuel manifold and pressure regw
later to air intake. Remove washers from either side of bushings in fuel manifold brackets.
1. Accelerator cable 2. Throttle plate switch 3. Bypass hose
4. Cold start valve 5. Auxiliary air regulator hose 6. Bolt
102.26
Page 10-101
Page 10-102
Remove two nuts (8i and washers holding intake manifold
cooling air duct (6) to studs (4) on manifold (5).
Disconnect cooling air hose from duct. Remove duct.
Remove four nuts (2) and washers holding air intake to mani—
fold.
Carefully lift air intake off studs (4) in manifold. Tilt air intake
backwards.
1. Air intake 2. Nut 3. Gasket 4. Stud
5. Cooling air duct 7. Nut 8. Nut
5. Manifold
Disconnect electrical connectors from fuel injectors.
Using a 4 mm Allen wrench, remove two bolts (4) and washers
holding fuel injectors (3) in intake manifold (2).
Remove fuel injectors and adapters (1) from manifold. Be
careful not to damage bushings and "0" rings on injectors
and adapters.
Remove fuel manifold.
1. Adapter
2. Intake manifold
3.‘Fuel injectors
4. Allen bolts
Remove small [5] and large (2) rubber bushings and retainer
s
{6) from injectors {1 ).
Remove “0“ ring (3) from adapter (4).
Inspect bushings and ”0" rings for cracks and damage.
1. Fuel injector
5. Small bushing
2. Large bushing
6. Retainer
3. "O" ring 4. Adapter
Fuel Injection System
102.26
Page 1 0-1 03
IINSTALLATION
NOTE: When replacing a defective injector. replace both
the injector and hose.
To replace injector (1), pull hose (3) off fuel manifold (5). Use
a twisting, rocking motion while pulling on hose.
To replace a damaged hose on a good injector, cut hose at
both ends and remove it.
When installing new hose on injector, place collar (2 and 4)
over shoulder of injector and manifold.
Push hose on injector and manifold until hose end is inside
collar and collar is tight against shoulder.
To complete installation. reverse removal procedure. Make
sure retaining bolts are tight. Check all fuel and air connections
for leaks.
1. Injector
2. Collar
3. Hose
4. Collar
5. Fuel manifold
THROTTLE PLATE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: The upper air intake should be removed for ease of access to throttle plate. Mark lines, hoses and wires prior
to removal to identify for installation.
Loosen clamp (2) and disconnect air supply hose (1) from
throttle housing (12).
Disconnect electrical connectors (3 and 7) from throttle plate
switch (4) and cold start valve (6).
Disconnect vacuum hoses (8, 10, and 11) from air intake (5).
Remove clamp (9) holding fuel hose on cold start valve. Pull
fuel hose off valve.
CAUTION: Use care in pulling fuel hose off valve. Valve body
is plastic.
1. Air hose 2. Clamp 3. Cennector 4. Throttle plate switch
5. Air intake 6. Cold start valve 7. Connector 8. Vacuum hose
9. Clamp 10. Vacuum hose 11. Vacuum hose 12. Throttle housing
Disconnect throttle shaft cable (2) from linkage (4) by remov-
ing spring clip (3). Disconnect cable from throttle lever (8).
Disconnect vacuum hoses (6 and 7) from air intake (9).
Remove two bolts (1) holding fuel manifold and pressure regulator (5) to air intake.
1. Bolt 2. Throttle shaft cable 3. Spring clip 4. Throttle linkage
5. Fuel pressure regulator 6. Vacuum hose 7. Vacuum hose
8. Throttle lever 9. Air intake
Page 10-104
Remove two nuts (8) and washers holding intake manifold
cooling air duct (6) to studs (4) on manifold (5).
Disconnect cooling air hose from duct. Remove duct.
Remove four nuts (2) and washers holding air intake to mani-
fold.
Carefully lift air intake off studs (4) in manifold. Tilt air intake
backwards.
1.Air intake
2. Nut
6. Cooling air duct
3. Gasket
7. Nut
4. Stud
5 Manifold
8. Nut
Remove two screws and washers and remove throttle plate
switch.
Working through throttle housing, remove two screws (6) and
washers and remove throttle plate (5).
If necessary to remove throttle shaft (2), remove two springs
(1 and 11). Pull throttle shaft out of housing.
1. Spring
6. Screw
2. Throttle shaft 3. Seal 4. Bushing 5. Throttle plate
'1'. Bushing 8. Seal 9. Cam 10. Plate 11. Spring
Assemble and install in reverse order. Check all fuel connections for leaks.
After installation, adjust throttle plate as follows:
NOTE: Engine must be at normal operating temperature and
cooling fan off when adjusting idle speed.
Connect tachometer. Run engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
Turn idle speed adjustment screw (2) in all the way. Adjust
stop screw (1) to obtain 700 to 800 RPM. Hold stop screw and
tighten locknut.
Adjust idle speed adjustment screw (2) to obtain 800 to 900
RPM. Hold adjustment screw and tighten locknut.
Check that throttle plate switch is adjusted properly as direct-
ed under THROTTLE PLATE SWITCH ADJUSTMENT.
1. Throttle stop screw
2. ldle speed adjustment screw
Exhaust and Emission Control System 102.58
Page 10405
1. Engine air cleaner
2. Air distribution line
3. Vacuum tapping line far thermovalve 22
4. Heated water line for thermovalves and automatic choke
5. EGR valve control line
6. 6q valve control elactrovalve-three-wav
'1'. Gulp valve
8. EGFI valve
9. Automatic choke
10. Exhaust gas line from EGR valve to intake manifold and gulp valve
line to intake manifold
11. Air pump and pressure relief valve
12. Power valve
13. Vacuum accelerator pump
14. Vacuum tapping lines for alectrovalves 6 and thermovalves 20—21
15. Advance capsule vacuum tapping line
15. Check valve lwith air pumpI reed valve (without air pump)
1?. Vacuum advance capsule
18. Electrovalve 6 control thermoewitch
19. EGR valve tapping line
20. Vacuum accelerator pump control thermovalve
21. Power valve control thermovalve
22. EGR valve control tharmovalve
23. Electrovalve 6 vacuum tapping line
24. Catalytic converter
AIR INDUCTION
l??-
“K
u'llil'lvml'lfllflllflfll'flflfllllliflifll.II'IIIIII'II'MIE
"'14”
ll-
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
(VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR)
l/J
AIR INJECTION
Page 10-106
DISTRIBUTOR
VACUUM
CAPSULE
I
O
CARBURETOR
\
VACUUM
ACCELERATOR
EMISSION VACUUM CONTROLS
Exhaust and Emission Control System 102.58
Page 1 0-1 07
1. Outlet
2. Flame trap
3. Bypass
4. Valve
5. Intake
6. Hose
7. Cvclonic trap
8. Return Iine
1. Intake maniiold
2. Throttle plate
3. Bypass hose
4. Flame trap
5. Hose
6. Cyclonic trap
7. Return line
VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION
CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Page 10-108
1. Fuel filter
2. Carburetor
3. Charcoal canister
8
4. Filler cap
5. Two-way valve
6. Separator
7. Check valve
7
I
f 0
¢
1
2
8. Fuel pump
9. Fuel tank
0
\
6
ul—
FFIONT
‘
...___ 9
i
--—I--
I
T :P
/
——--
5
4
3
VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR
1, Fuel injectors
2. Fuel manifold
3. Charcoal canister
4. Intake manifold
5. Cold start valve
6. Fuel pressure regulator
7. Filler cap
8. Two-way valve
9. Twu-way safety relief valve
10. Separator
11. Fuel pump
12. Fuel filter
2
3
FRONT
VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION
FUEL EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Exhaust and Emlsslon Control System 102.58
Page 10409
AIR PUMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove three bolts (1) holding upper half of timing belt cover
(2) to engine and remove cover.
Loosen clamps (3) retaining air pump intake (5) and pressure
(4) hoses and remove hoses.
1. Bolts
2. Timing belt cover
3. Clamps
4. Pressure hose
5. Intake hose
Remove adjusting bolt (4) and slip drive belt (3) off of pulley.
Remove pivot through bolt (2) and remove air pump (1).
Installation is reverse of removal. To adjust belt, refer to 101 .15.
1. Air pump
2. Pivot bolt
3. Drive belt 4. Adjusting bolt
GULP VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove two vacuum hoses (4) from gulp valve (1).
Remove air hose (2) lrom gulp valve.
Remove nut (3) and washer holding gulp valve to bracket
and remove gulp valve.
Installation is reverse of removal.
I. Gulp valve
2. Air hose
3. Nut
4. Vacuum hoses
Page 10-110
EGR VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove access panel from inside trunk.
Remove three nuts (1 ), bolt (5) and washers to remove tube (2), spacer (21 ) and gasket(20). Remove two nuts(4), washer
and shieldi3).
Unscrew fitting (19) to remove tube (6). Remove gasket (7) and seal (18).
Disconnect vacuum line (17) from EGR valve (9.).
mseeswvr
Remove bolts (8 and 14) and washers to remove EGR valve and gasket (13).
Loosen clamp (15) to disconnect water hose (16) from water manifold.
Remove two bolts (10) and washers to remove mounting base (11) and gasket (12).
Installation is reverse of removal. Replace all gaskets.
Nut
Tube
. Shield
Nut
Bolt
Tube
Gasket
. Bolt
”Nddflfifldddd—i
dawmummw-aoo
. EGR valve
. Bolt
. Mounting base
. Gasket
. Gasket
. Bolt
. Clamp
. Water hose
. Vacuum line
. Seal
. Fitting
. Gasket
. Spacer
Exhaust and Emission Control System 102.58
Page 10-111
CHECK VALVE OR REED VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove clamp (2) holding hose (1) to valve (3).
Loosen locknut (4) and unscrew valve from engine.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Hose
2. Clamps
3. Valve
4. Locknut
CHARCOAL CANISTEFI
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Cut off clamps (1) retaining vacuum hoses (4 and 5) to charcoal canister (2).
Remove two nuts (3) and washers holding charcoal canister
to bracket and remove canister.
Installation is reverse of removal. Use new clamps on vacuum
hoses.
‘l. Clamp
2. Charcoal canister
3. Nut
4. Vacuum hose
5. Vacuum hoses
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Carburetor)
WARNING: Make sure converter has cooled down before
working on it.
Straighten lock tabs and remove four nuts (6) and bolts
attaching exhaust pipe flange (3) to converter outlet flange
(7).
Remove bolt (1) holding support bracket (3) to muffler.
Straighten lock tabs and remove four nuts (5) attaching converter inlet flange (4) to exhaust pipe flange.
Remove support bracket.
Separate exhaust pipe flange and converter outlet flange.
then pull converter ( 1) off of studs and out of vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Catalytic converter 2. Bolt 3. Bracket
7. Outlet flange 8. Flange
6. Nuts
4. Inlet flange
5. Nut
Page 10-112
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
WARNING: Make sure converter has cooled down before
working on it.
Straighten lock tabs and remove four nuts (1) and bolts attaching exhaust pipe flange (2) to converter inlet flange (3).
Remove two bolts (5) holding exhaust system bracket (6) to
transmission bracket (4).
Straighten lock tabs and remove four nuts (8) attaching converter outlet flange (7) to exhaust pipe flange.
Remove exhaust system bracket.
Maneuver converter (9) off of studs and out of vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Nuts 2. Exhaust pipe flange 3. Converter inlet flange
4. Transmission bracket 5. Belts 6. Bracket 7. Outlet flange
8. Nuts 9. Catalytic converter
EXHAUST SYSTEM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Carburetor)
Remove rear access panel from inside trunk.
Remove two nuts (3) and clamp (2) attaching exhaust pipe
(4) to manifold (1).
1. Exhaust manifold
2. Clamp
3. Nuts
4. Exhaust pipe
Raise and support rear of vehicle.
Remove six screws and four bolts retaining rear grille assembly
and remove grille assembly.
Disconnect six springs (1 and 3) supporting muffler (2) and
lower complete exhaust system out vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Springs
2. Muffler 3. Springs
Exhaust and Emission Control System 102.58
Page 1‘04 13
1O
6. Flange
7. Bracket
1. CIamp
2. Flange
3. Stud
8. Catalytic converter
9. Bracket
4. Exhaust pipe
10. Muffler assembly
5. Locking ring
EXPLODED VIEW OF EXHAUST SYSTEM
(VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOR)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
From inside trunk. remove floor mat. insulation panel. and
access panel.
Unplug Lambda sensor connector and remove Lambda sensor {4) from exhaust pipe [3).
Remove three nuts (2) attaching exhaust pipe to manifold (1).
1. Exhaust manifold
2. Nuts
3. Exhaust pipe 4. Lambda sensor
11. Springs
12. Looking ring
13. Looking ring
14. Stud
15. Spring
Page 10-114
Raise and support rear of vehicle.
Remove six screws and four bolts retaining rear grille assembly.
and remove assembly.
a
Remove two bolts l2l holding exhaust system support bracket
{3) to transmission bracket.
Disconnect six springs (1 and 4) supporting muffler (5) and
lower complete exhaust system out from vehicle.
installation is reverse of removal.
2. Bolts
3. Support
4. Springs
5. Muffler
. Locking ring
seasons-
1. Springs
. Exhaust pipe
. Lock plate
Muffler assembly
Springs
Flange
. Bracket
8 . Catalytic converter
. Stud
EXPLODED VIEW OF EXHAUST SYSTEM
(VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.
9.
Breather hose
Flame trap
Seal
Blow-by gas and oil vapor hose
Oil filler cap
Oil pressure switch
Breather oil return pipe
Cyclonic trap
Dipstick
‘
Lubrication
103.01
Page 10-115
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
1?.
13.
19.
Oil filter connector
Dipstick seal
Oil pump
Bushing
Oil pump drive gear
Oil filter
Auxiliary shaft
Bushings
Gasket
10. Gasket
LUBRICATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Paoe10-116
£25
5:..3 at 83.5 BE :0
oni :263 9:3 .5
can: 3:! 2885 :0
QE3 :0
9.9; 309.5
N—
.2.
.2
.m
.N
.h
ZOFiOEflDJ mZEZm
:0
.95.... .m
0::
5.6 .3 an:
9:2. __o .m
9
52.: =0 30:43".
an.
239...
.23::%
Edmwsa
2ft
8:30:83
£558
uni
32:6
33%
as... 3.63:5
.3
.v
.m
25:55
£21.50
uca 8:2
.—
:0 .u
3.3.5
SE
Lubrication
OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
comma-rho)»
1. Pump housing
. Cover plate
. Pressure relief valve
. Spring
. Washer
. Drive gear
. Driven gear
. Oil intake pickup
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Engine in vehicle)
Drain oil sump. Remove bolts and washers holding sump to
engine and remove sump.
Remove three bolts (2) and washers holding oil pump (3). Remove pump and gasket.
Installation is reverse of removal.
When installing pump, make sure it is seated before tightening
bolts.
Clean sump gasket surfaces thoroughly. Install all new gaskets.
1. Oil return pipe from breather
2. Bolt
3. Oil pump
INSPECTION
Carefully clamp pump body in a vise.
Remove three bolts holding pickup housing to pump housing
{5) and remove.
Remove spring (3), relief valve (4) and cover (2).
Slide drive shaft with drive gear and driven gear out of housing.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
Check housing and cover for cracks. Check intake pickup and
oil duct for clogging. Blow clear with compressed air.
1. Pump shaft
2. Cover
3. Spring
4. Reiiefvalve
5. Pump housing
103.01
Page 10-117
Page 10-113
Examine gears for wear.
Backlash between gears is .006 in. (0.15 mm) when new. Maxi-
mum allowable clearance is .010 in. (0.25 mm).
Check gear tooth to pump housing clearance with feeler gage
as shown. New clearance ranges from .004 to .007 in. (0.11 to
0.18 mml. Maximum allowable clearance is .010 in. (0.25 mm).
Replace housing and or gears if clearances are exceeded.
Check clearance between gears and cover mating face.
Using a straightedge and feeler gage as shown, clearance range
should be .0008 to .0041. in. (.020 to 0.150 mm). if a value of
more than .006 in. (0.15 mm) is found, either the gears and or
pump housing must be replaced.
To determine if gears are worn, measure their length. The range
for new gears is 1.101 to 1.102 in. (27.967 to 28.000 mm).
The drive gear is mounted on its shaft with an interference fit,
check for signs of slack.
Clearance between driven gear and its shaft is .0006 to .0022
in. (0.017 to 0.057 mm]. Maximum allowable clearance is
.004 in. 0.10 mm).
Check clearance between pump drive shaft and pump housing.
Clearance range is .0006 to .0023 in. (0.016 to 0.060 mm).
Maximum allowable clearance is .004 in. (0.10 mm).
Relief Valve Inspection
_
Relief valve should be carefully cleaned and inspected.
NOTE: Particular care should be given to ensuring that dirt
827 in
21 mm
.H-
886 in
22,5 mm
Check load characteristics of spring as shown.
_
1 583 In
40.2 mm
and residue are removed from between valve and pump housing, otherwise valve may stick.
10.16 $.33 lbs
Y kg 4,61 i0,15
11.023 1.33 lbs
kg 5 10,15
103.01
Lubrication
Page 10-119/120
1.2m 0.32.000 mm
1.2006 01.31020 mm
‘
F
‘13:
1.4041 in. 35,050 mm
1,4049 in. 35,684 mm
A
-
_ f
1.2515 in. 31,940 mm
1.2503 in. 31,900 mm
1.4013 in. 35,593 mm
1.4023 in. 35,510 mm
-
1—1‘k
SPECIFICATIONS OF AUXILIARY SHAFT AND BORES IN BLOCK
AUXILIARY SHAFT
Auxiliary shaft (for oil pump, and ignition distributor on non A/C vehicles) should have an absolutely smooth journal. If signs of
scuffing or scoring are found, which cannot be removed by an extra-fine abrasive stone, replacement of shaft is recommended.
inspect oil pump and ignition distributor drive gear teeth for evidence of chipping or excessive wear. if these are found. replace
shaft.
Check that auxiliary shaft journal diameters conform to specifications shown.
AUXILIARY SHAFT JOURNALS
AND BUSHINGS FIT SPECIFICATIONS
Bushing inside
Auxiliary shaft
journal
diameter
Clearance
1.4041 in
(35.604 mm)
1.4013 in
(35.593 mm)
.0018 in
(0.046 mm)
1.4049 in
1.4023 in
.0036 in
diameter
(finish reamed)
10
(35.684 mm)
1.2598 in
to
(35.618 mm)
1.2575 in
to
(0.091 mm)
.0016
(32.000 mm)
(31.940 mm)
(0.040 mm)
1.2606 in
1.2583 in
.0031 in
to
(32.020 mm)
1)
10
(31.960 mm)
Drive end bushing
to
(0.000 mm)
2) Inside bushing.
Radiator and Fan
104.01/.09
Page 10-121
msewewwd
. Fan shroud
Thermostatic switch
Relay
. Radiator
Support bracket
Bleed screw
Fan assembly
. Rubber pad
EXPLODED VIEW OF RADIATOR AND ELECTRIC FAN
RADIATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, remove
and install as directed in CONDENSER REMOVAL
AND INSTALLATION. Refer to 501.03.
Raise and support front of vehicle. Drain cooling system.
Disconnect connector (4) for electric fan (3).
Disconnect connector for thermostatic switch (8).
Loosen clamps (1 and 7) and disconnect radiator hoses (2).
Remove two nuts (9) holding support bracket (5), and lower
radiator out of vehicle complete with fan.
Install in reverse order.
1. Clamp 2. Hosa 3. Electric fan 4. Connector 5, Support bracket
6. Radiator 7. Clamp B. Thermostatic switCh 9. Nut
Page 10-122
FILLING AND BLEEDING
Remove rubber plug (1) from front of luggage compartment.
Using an 8 mm hex wrench, loosen radiator bleed screw.
Pour coolant slowly into expansion tank until coolant begins
to run out of bleed screw. Close bleed screw.
Complete filling of expansion tank.
Start engine and move heater temperature control lever to
warmest position.
Accelerate engine to circulate coolant.
Turn engine off. Bleed system through bleed screw until coolant is free of bubbles.
1. Rubber plug
TESTING
Attach tester (I) to expansion tank.
Pump in air'until pressure of 14 psi is built up. If system does
not hold pressure, check for leaks.
Test cap (3) by applying pressure with tester as shown. Check
that vent valve opens at 11 psi.
1.Tester
2. Union
3. Radiator cap
ELECTRIC FAN
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect connector (1) for fan (2).
Remove four nuts (3) holding tan assembly to radiator (4) and
remove Ian assembly.
Install in reverse order.
1. Connector
2. Fan
3. Nut
4. Radiator
104.02
Water Pump and Ducts
Page 10-123
FROM BLOCK
Thermostat starts to open at 172° to 183°F (78° to 84°C].
Thermostat is fully open at 194° to 201°F (90° to 94°C].
3
1. Union for coolant reservoir
2. Union for water pump inlet pipe
3. Union for water inlet hose from radiator
4. Union for water outlet hose to radiator
\
I
/
THERMOSTAT FULLY OPEN
3
OPERATION OF BYPASS THERMOSTAT
Page 10-124
WATER PUMP
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
If equipped with air pump, remove top half of timing belt cover.
Remove air pump and drive belt.
Remove alternator (1}, drive belt, and alternator mount (2).
1. Alternator
2. Alternator mount
If equipped with air conditioning, remove compressor with
hoses attached and set to one side. Remove compressor mount.
Remove two bolts (2) holding water pipe (3) to water pump
l4) and disconnect pipe.
Remove four bolts (5) holding pump to block and remove pump
and gasket.
Installation is reverse of removal. Use new gaskets.
1.A/C compressor mount
2. Bolt
3. Water pump
4. Bracket
5. Bolt
THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Drain cooling system to below thermostat assembly level.
Remove clamps (2, 5. and 7) from three large hoses and two
coolant recovery hoses (3). Remove hoses from assembly.
On fuel injected vehicles, remove coolant temperature sensor connector (6].
Remove three bolts (1) holding thermostat assembly (4) to
cylinder head. Remove assembly and gasket.
1. Bolt
2. Clamp
5. Clamp
3. Coolant recovery hoses
5. Coolant temperature sensor
4. Thermostat assembly
7. Clamp
Water Pump and Ducts
104.02
Page 10-125/126
To remove thermostat from assembly. remove three bolts (6)
and washers holding housing cover (5) to housing (1).
-Remove thermostat l3) and seal (2) from housing.
Installation is reverse of removal. Use new gaskets.
1. Housing
2. Seal
3. Thermostat
4. Gasket
5. Housing cover
d
6. Bolt
1_. Hose
2. Hose
3. Hose
4. Thermostat assembly
5. Hose
6, Water manifold
7. Gasket
8. Water pump
9. Gasket
EXPLODED VIEW OF WATER PUMP AND DUCTS ‘
Service Tools
10A
Page 10-127
w
k a
4467
A.50113
Oil sump drain plug spanner
A.50‘|21
Crankshaft pully nut spanner
Exhaust gas analyzer adapter for
fuel—injected vehicles
wax
4852
A.50131
Adapters for tightening 19 mm hex
cylinder head nuts. intake side
A.50132
Adapter for tightening camshaft box
bolts
A.50172
Adapters for tightening 17 mm hex
cylinder head bolts. intake side
A.60041
Cylinder head support
A/C belt tension tool
A.10061
Engine stand
A.40026
Extractor for water pump Impeller
A.40052
Cylinder head extractor
Page 10-128
A.6031‘l
Oil filter remover
Valve leak test tools
E l.
A.60054
WW
-
A.60041/2
i
3
"
‘” -.0I.*-
A.60313
Drift for inserting valve guide seals
A.60326
Drift for removing oil pump distributor
drive gear bushing
A.60368
Flange and bushing for positioning crankshaft on grinder
Driit for removing and inserting smal|~end
bushing
A.60183
Expanding tool for piston rings
A.60303
Tool for inserting gudgeon pin circlips
an
9;. iiiiiiiliii
A.60370
Tool kit for testing cylinder head for
leaks
gm
A5031 1
Valve spring compressor
A.60372
Drift for removing and fitting auxiliary
shaft bushing
10A
Service Tools
Page 10-129
_______fl
A.60459
Engine cranking tool
'
“ Marten-neon:
A.60373
Tool for removing and fitting water pump
pully and positioning impeller
A.60395
Drift for removing valve guides
A.60421
Tappet pressure lever
‘
A.60442
A.60462
m-m.,m
Cylinder head base plate
A.60473
._
J
..
Drift for fitting valve guides
a; t
Camshaft sprocket lock
”PM“ /'
A.60455
Cylinder head support for removing
tappet shims
A.60498
Auxiliary shaft sprocket lock
Page 1 0-130
H
m
M
A.60592
Lifting tackle for removing and refitting
engine
_"l
A.601001/231 Engine mounting bracket, flywheel
side, for rotating engine stand
A.70577
Support for removing and refitting power
unit - Use with hydraulic jack
A.76036
Jumper cables with starter motor attachment terminals for rotating engine
during tappet adjustment
A3064!)
"'_— I'-
Flywheel leek
A.86010
Drive (10 mm) for fitting crankshaft
G“
welch plugs
A.61001/27 Engine mounting bracket, valve gear
slide, for rotating engine stand
A.87001
Special pliers for removing tappet shims
10A
Service Tools
Page 10-131
lit-£14134.
.W
A.90308
Expanding reamer (22 mm) for small-
end bushings
A.94016/10 Seat cutter (10 mm) for crankshaft
plugs (use with A.94016l
W
A.90310
Finishing reamer (8 mm) for valve
guide bores
A.95113
Feeler gages for checking tappet clearance
A.90365
Auxiliary shaft bushing raamer
A.95|24
Set of calibrated wires for adjusting
throttle valve
A.94016
Mandril for operating reamer
A.95136
Gage for checking float level
Page 10-132
AS5751
Tool for checking toothed timing
belt tension
A.9_5868
Valve seat tester
A.96‘l48
Standand bore gage (86 mm)
A.96219
Gage for checking valve stem height
A.96238
Combustion chamber depth gage
:-
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
CLUTCH - 18
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL &
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
18
18
181.03
181.09
18A
specifications...............................' .....
Torque Specifications .............................
Clutch Hydraulic Release Control ...................
Clutch ............................................
Service Tools ......................................
Page
18-1
18-1
18-3
18-7
18-9
18
Clutch .
Page18-1
V/“*" c
SPECIFICATIONS
MM
IN.
DESCRIPTION
Type ............................................. ..........
Dry, single plate, diaphragm spring.
Hydraulically controlled. Selfadjusting, with no pedal free travel.
Clutch disc. ...............................................
With friction linings
Lining O.D ................................................
7.5
190
Lining l.D .................................., ................
5 .1
130
Max. runout of disc linings ................................
0.008
0.2
0.335 to 0.374
8.5 to 9.5
Master cylinder bore ......................................
3/4
19.05
Operating cylinder bore ...................................
3/4
19.05
Diaphragm spring travel corresponding to a
minimum pressure plate travel of not
less than .067 in. (1 .7 mm) ............................
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TOROUE FIGURE
Ft. Lb.
Kgm
DESCRIPTION
THREAD
N-m
Bolt, clutch to flywheel ............................
M 8
38.2
3.9
28
Bolt, clutch release fork ...........................
M 8
26.5
2.7
19.5
Bolt, operating cylinder ............................
M 8
26.5
2.7
19.5
Bolt, operating cylinder support plate to
transmission case. . . . . ......................
M 8
26.5
2.7
19.5
Nut, master cylinder to support bolt ................
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Page 1 8-2
CLUTCH COVER AND CLUTCH DISC
Clutch Hydraulic Release Control
/’-\»
181.03
Page 18-3
CHECKING FLUID LEVEL
Remove cap from reservoir (1 ) and check fluid level. Fluid should
be up to neck of reservoir.
lf level is low, check fluid lines, master cylinder and operating
cylinder for leakage.
1. Clutch fluid reservoir
BLEEDING CLUTCH CIRCUIT
Connect a hose to bleeder screw (1) on operating cylinder (2).
Place other end of hose in a container filled with fluid. Loosen
bleeder screw.
Have an assistant pump clutch pedal until all air bubbles stop.
With pedal held to floor, remove hose and tighten bleeder screw.
Fill reservoir.
1. Bleeder screw
2. Operating cylinder
ADJUSTING PEDAL RELEASE TRAVEL
Clutch pedal travel should be about 6.7 in. (170 mm).
If travel is incorrect, loosen Iocknut (2)' and turn screw (1)‘in
or out as necessary to obtain proper pedal travel.
1. Adjustment screw
,/\
2. Locknut
3. Clutch pedal
,
l
l
r
Page 18-4
_|_|
1.
2.
f3 .
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
O.
1.
Reservoir
Bracket
Lockwasher and nut
Hose
Connector
Cla mp
Washer
Throwout bearing
Bolt
Clutch assembly
Spring clip
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Bushing
Seal
Spring
Cotter pin
Washer
Spnng
Washer
Lever
Threaded block
Nuts
Operating cylinder
CLUTCH RELEASE CONTROL COMPONENTS
23. Support plate
24. Union bolt
25. Gasket washer
. Gasket washer
27. Bolt and lockwasher
28. Hose
29. Clip
30. Release fork
31. Rubber ring
32-
Hydraulic line
33. lWaEteE cylinder
34. Clutch pedal
Clutch Hydraulic Release Control
/*‘\‘
181.03
Page 1 8-5
MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove lower steering column cover.
Disconnect hydraulic line (1) from master cylinder (2). Cap
line.
Remove two nuts (5) and washers. Slide bolts (4) out until
cylinder can be pulled out and off of cylinder rod.
Loosen hose clamp and remove hose (6). Drain fluid into container. Remove master cylinder.
Install in reverse order. Use new hose clamp. Fill reservoir,
bleed clutch circuit, and check for leaks.
1. Hydraulic line
5. Nut 6. Hose
2. Master cylinder
3. Brake line bracket
4. Bolt
OVERHAUL
Remove boot (3), lock ring (1) and seal (2). Remove remaining internal parts (items 8 through 12) from cylinder (7).
Carefully inspect cylinder bore and piston surfaces. They should have a mirror-like finish without any kind of roughness. The cylinder
bore can be honed to prevent leaks or exCessive wear of seals and pistons. Do not increase size of bore. Replace seals and boot. Clean
all parts with denatured alcohol and lubricate with brake fluid. Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.
1. Lock ring
2. Seal
3. Boot
4. Gasket
5. Connector
6. Lock plate
7. Cylinder
8. Spring
9. Seal
10. Seal
11. Gasket
12. Piston
EXPLODED VIEW OF MASTER CYLINDER
OPERATING CYLINDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
On vehicles with carburetor, remove carburetor cooling duct.
On vehicles with fuel injection, remove air cleaner. Refer to
102.04.
Remove union bolt (1) from operating cylinder (2).
Hold spring (5) compressed and remove cotter pin, washer,
spring and remaining washer from end of cylinder rod (4).
Remove two bolts (3) and washers holding cylinder to support
plate (6). Pull cylinder out.
Install in reverse order. Use new copper gasket washers on
union bolt. Bleed cylinder and fill reservoir.
1. Union bolt 2. Operating cylinder
5. Spring 6. Support plate
3. Bolts
4. Cylinder rod‘
OVERHAUL
Remove bleeder screw(5). Remove cylinder rod (6) and boot (7). Remove remaining internal parts(items 8 through 11 and 1 through
3) from cylinder (4).
Carefully inspect cylinder bore and piston surfaces. They should have a mirror-like finish without any kind of roughness. The cylinder
bore can be honed to prevent leaks or excessive wear of seals and pistons. Do not increase size of bore. Replace seals and boot. Clean
all parts with denatured alcohol and lubricate with brake fluid. Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.
3
2
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Spring
Washer
Lock ring
Cylinder
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bleeder screw
Cylinder rod
Boot
Seal
9. Piston
10. Seal
11. Bushing
EXPLODED VIEW OF OPERATING CYLINDER
Clutch
181.09
Page 18-7
REMOVAL
Remove transmission as specified in Section 21.
If same clutch assembly is to be installed, mark position on
flywheel so that correct balance will be maintained.
Remove clutch assembly (2 and 3) by gradually loosening and
then removing six bolts (1 ).
1. Bolt
2. Pressure plate
3. Disc
INSPECTION
Disc
Check that surface of friction material is not less than 1/16 in.
from rivet heads and is not cracked or glazed.
r-‘x
Check that disc is not warped.
' Check that springs (3), plate (4) or splines (5) are not damaged.
Replace disc if damaged.
1. Friction material
2. Rivet head
3. Spring
4. Plate
5. Splines
Pressure Plate
Check that fingers (1) of diaphragm spring are not broken,
cracked or misaligned.
Check facing (2) for heat cracks, scoring or burns.
For minor imperfections, dress with medium grit emery cloth.
Replace if damaged.
Check mounting hardware for damage. Replace if damaged.
1. Fingers
‘r‘x
2. Facing
Flywheel
Inspect flywheel (3) for grooves, gauling, burns or heat cracks.
For minor imperfections, lightly dress with medium grit emery
cloth. For severe damage, replace flywheel.
affected.
_
_
Check pilot bearing (6) for wear. Replace if worn.
Check ring gear (1) for damaged teeth. Replace if considered
not serviceable.
1. Ring gear
2. Pin
3. Flywheel
4. Plate
5. Bolt
'
(‘KK
/ :
\ .
L /) 1
/ '
L f:
l
:7“;
1:"
”Q. J' ‘5‘
\bk”
-
Check mounting bolt holes for stripped threads. Repair with
helical insert. Do not use oversize bolts, as balance will be
Ly /
6. Pilot bearing
Throwout Bearing, Fork and Lever
Check throwout bearing (7) for serviceability. Replace if worn.
Check that spring clips (8) are properly installed.
Check that lever (1) moves freely and does not bind. If binding, disassemble by removing bolt (5) and lockwasher (6).
Clean bearing surfaces, and check that bushing (3) is not worn.
Replace if bushing is worn.
VI
Check that fork (4) is not cracked or worn. Replace if damaged.
When replaced, torque bolt (5) to 19.5 ft. lbs. (2.7 kgm).
1. Lever 2. Seal 3. Bushing 4. Fork
7. Throwout bearing 8. Spring clip
5. Bolt
6. Lockwasher
INSTALLATION
lf flywheel was removed, torque mounting bolts to 61 ft. lbs.
(8.5 kgm).
Make sure clutch and flywheel surfaces are clean. If old clutch
assembly is reinstalled, align marks made during removal.
With protruding part of disc facing away from flywheel, loosely
assemble clutch assembly (1) on flywheel.
Using pilot tool A.70210 (3), center disc in pressure plate.
Gradually torque mounting bolts (2) to 28 ft. lbs. (3.9 kgm).
Remove pilot tool.
Lightly coat transmission shaft with white grease, then install
transmission as specified in Section 21.
1. Clutch assembly
2. Bolt
3. Pilot tool
\J”
Service Tools
18A
Page 1 7877-7572/10
A.70210
Tool for centering driven plate on flywheel
FIAT-$AT-A.702l0
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
TRANSMISSION - DIFFERENTIAL AXLE - 21/27
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 81
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
212.00
Specifications .......................................
Torque Specifications ...............................
Transmission ........................................
Page
21 -1
21-2
21 -5
212.33
274.02
21 A
Speedometer Drive ..................................
Axle Shafts .........................................
Service Tools ........................................
21 ~29
21 -31
21 -33
21
21
_
,3‘
'91-."
212.21
Gearshift Controls ...................................
21 -25
21
Transmission
Page 21-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Gears .................................................
5 forward, 1 reverse
Synchronizers
Blocker type, conventional cone ..................
Porsche type ......................................
1st and 2nd
3rd. 4th and 5th
first ...............................................
second ............................................
third ........ . .....................................
fourth .............................................
1979-80
3.583
2.235
1 .454
1 .042
1981-82
3.583
2.235
1.461
1 .033
reverse ...........................................
3.714
3.714
Gear ratios to 1
fifth ...............................................
0.863
0,863
Backlash between gears ..............................
.004 in. (0.1 mm)
Alignment tolerance of shafts .........................
.002 in. (0.05 mm)
Clearance between reverse gear shaft and bush
fitted to gear ......................................
.003 to .006 in. (0.08 to 0.15 mm)
DRIVING AXLE
Final drive gear set ....................................
Helical, cylindrical
Final drive ratio .......................................
Oil type ...........................................
Quantity ..........................................
13/53 (4.077 to 1)
SAE 80/90W
3.2 qt. (3.0 It)
Differential case bearings .............................
2
Type of bearings ......................................
Tapered roller
Adjustment for preload of differential case bearings. . .
Through shims
Pinion to side gears backlash adjustment ..............
NONE
Power drive to rear wheels .............................
By axle shafts connected to final drive and to
wheels through constant-velocity ball joints
Page 21—2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
THREAD
N-rn
Bolt retaining internal selector and
spring cover ....................................
M 8
24.4
Lower nut retaining cover to plate ..................
M 6
9.5
Nut for bolt retaining bell housing
to engine .......................................
M 12 x 1.25
Nut retaining plate to gearbox ......................
M 6
Bolt retaining gearbox cover and plate ..............
TORQUE FIGURE
Kgm
Ft. Lb.
2.5
18
TRANSMISSION
1
7
8
58
9.5
1
7
M 6
9.5
1
7
Bolt retaining power unit su5pension plate,
cover, and bracket to gearbox ...................
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt retaining bell housing to engine ...............
M 12 x 1.5
79
8.
58
Bolt retaining starter motor to bell housing .........
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt retaining gearbox front cover ..................
M 6
.8
8
6
Bolt retaining bell housing to gearbox ..............
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt retaining reversing shaft plate .................
M 6
19.5
Lock nut for 5-speed main and layshaft .............
M 20 x 1.5
Bolt retaining gearshift fork and lug ................
M 6
Bolt retaining crown wheel ........................
M 10 x 1.25
Bolt retaining differential case flange to
gearbox housing ...............................
Bolt retaining bearing retainers to support .........
79
118
1
12
7
87
17.6
1.8
13
88
9
65
M 6
24.4
2.5
18
M 6
9.5
1
7
21
Transmission
Page 21-3/4
TOROUE FIGURE
Kgm
Ft. Lb.
THREAD
N-m
Bolt retaining gearshift lever .......................
M 6
19
Boit retaining gearshift lever support ...............
M 6
9.5
Bolt retaining transmission link to
transmission rod ...............................
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
Bolt retaining transmission link to selector rod .....
M 8
24.4
2.5
18
DESCRIPTION
TRANSMISSION EXTERNAL CONTROLS
2
14
1
7
212.00
Transmission
W\\\\\\
_ Page 21-5/6
Le;
S
ER! my >
k. , 4
54‘
q E3
Cross Section through Gear
Engagement Lever
I
‘
II 11
‘Ifé!!!’o
Longitudinal Section through
Forked Levers and Internal
Selector Rods
.0.
k‘
“‘
.
'Ig“
e
O CO
6i
g
T
("—IDI
I
Section thrIough Detent Springs
for Gear control Rods
34868
1
‘
Speedometer Sprocket Support
Section:
..
E
E
i
SECTIONS THROUGH} MANUAL TRANSMISSION
i
I
Transmission
212.00
Page 21 -7
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
On vehicles with fuel injection. remove air cleaner. On vehicles
with carburetor, remove carburetor cooling duct. Refer to
102.04.
Hold spring (2) compressed and remove cotter pin, washer.
Spring and remaining washer from end of cylinder rod (3).
Remove two bolts (5) holding cylinder (4) to support plate.
Move cylinder out of way.
Disconnect speedometer drive (1) from transmission.
Install engine support bar A.70526.
CAUTION: Be certain that support is attached to engine
and not to transmission.
Remove nuts and bolts holding transmission to crankcase
accessible from above.
1. Speedometer drive
2. Spring
3. Cylinder rod
4. Cylinder 5. Bolts
Raise vehicle. Remove rear wheels. Remove left side shield.
Disconnect reverse light switch connector (2).
Remove three bolts (1) holding starter to transmission. Move
starter out of transmission.
1. Bolts
2. Connector
Using a scribe. mark position of transmission link (3) in relation to gear selector rod (5).
Remove two bolts (4) holding transmission link to selector rod.
Loosen bolt (2) at transmission end of transmission link. Swing
link out of way.
NOTE: Transmission link on vehicles with carburetor does
not have flexible rubber coupling (1).
1. Flexible coupling
5. Selector rod
2. Bolt
3. Transmission link
4. Bolts
Disconnect ground strap (1) from chassis.
Remove six Allen head bolts (3) from each end of left side
half-shaft (4). Remove half-shaft complete with CV joints
(2 and 5).
Repeat above procedure to remove right side half-shaft and
CV joints.
NOTE: Discard Allen head bolts and replace with new ones
for installation. Torque new bolts to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgm).
1. Ground strap
5. Outer CV joint
2. Inner CV joint
3. Allen bolts
4. Half-shaft
Place transmission support under transmission.
0n vehicles with fuel injection, remove nuts attaching exhaust
system bracket (9) to exhaust flange.
Remove nut (5) and two bolts (8) holding transmission support
bracket (7) to transmission.
Loosen out (2) attaching shield to crosspiece (3). Remove
four crosspiece bolts (1 and 8).
Remove crosspiece. transmission support bracket and exhaust
system bracket (if so equipped) from vehicle as an assembly.
Remove remaining bolt holding flywheel guard (4) and remove
guard.
1. Bolts
2. Nut
3. Crosspiece
7. Support bracket
8. Bolt
4. Flywheel guard
5. Nut
6. Bolt
9. Exhaust system bracket
Remove remaining nut (1) and bolts holding transmission to
engine.
Lower transmission out from under vehicle.
Install in reverse order.
If difficult gear shifting or jumping out of gear is experienced
after installation. adjust gearshift linkage. Refer to 212.21.
1. Nut 2. Transmission
Transmission
212.00
Page 21-9
DISASSEMBLY
Install transmission (1) in suitable work stand.
Drain transmission oil through filler (2) and drain (3) openings.
Remove reverse switch (4).
Remove fifth gear cover (6) by removing four bolts (5) and
one nut.
1.1‘ransmission 2. Oil filler
5. Bolt 6. Fifth gear cover
3. Oil drain
4. Reverse switch
Remove both axle shafts (1) with side hammer puller (2).
NOTE: Replace axle shaft circlips with new ones for installation.
-\
1. Axle shaft
2. Puller
Remove bolt from fifth speed fork (4). Remove fork.
Engage fifth speed manually by pressing sliding sleeve (2)
down.
Engage transmission in another gear by moving shift lever. This
will lock shafts so that retaining nuts (3 and 5) can be removed.
Remove nuts.
1. Fifth gear 2. Sliding sleerre 3. Retaining nut
5. Retaining nut 6. Drive gear
4. Fork
Page 21-10
Remove fifth gear sliding sleeve and syncro hub (4).
Puller A.40005f002 (1) may be required for hub removal as
shown.
1. Puller AAOOOEIOM
4. mncro hub
2. Arms A.40005f302
3. l__ay shaft
Remove two bolts (1) holding detent spring cover (2). Carefully remove cover so that springs (3) do not fall out.
Note color coding and location of springs before removing. If colors are not visible, mark springs so that they will be assembled in
same location.
NOTE: Short thick spring is for fifth and reverse rod. On 1980 and up, all springs are same size.
With a magnetic tool (4} remove detent balls (5) as shown.
1. Bolt
2. Detent spring cover
3. Detent springs
4. Magnetic tool
5. Detent ball
Transmission
Slide driven gear and drive gear off.
Remove lock key.
Slide fifth gear bushing (1) off.
Remove intermediate cover by removing two bolts (6).
1. Fifth gear bushing 2. Layshaft 3. Fifth and reverse gear selector
rod 4. Mainshaft 5. Intermediate cover 6. Bolt
To remove main case (3), first remove bearing snap rings (6).
Remove three bolts inside of bell housing and nine bolts (7) on
outside of case. Remove main case.
1. Countershaf‘t bearing
5. Mainshaft bearing
2. Countershaf't
3. Main case
4. Meinshaft
Remove mainshaft (1) and countershaft (2) bearings with
puller (3} as shown. Note that bearing with split bushings is
installed on main shaft.
1. Mainshaft bearing
2. Countershaft bearing
3. Puller
212.00
Page 21-11
Page 21-12
Loosen five bolts holding forks (6) to selector rods.
First remove fifth and reverse selector rod (2). Carefully remove center rod (third and fourth) (3) with its lock pin. Remove re
maining rod (first and second) (4). After each rod is removed, remove related forks.
Pull out two lock pins (8) from rod housing with magnetic tool (9).
Remove bolt and clamp (7) holding reverse gear shaft (1). Remove shaft.
Remove three bolts and holding gearchange lever support bracket (5). Remove bracket and reverse lockout assembly.
1. Reverse gear shaft 2. Fifth and reverse gear selector rod 3. Third and fourth gear selector rod 4. First and second gear selector rod
5. Gearchange lever support bracket and reverse lockout assembly 6. Fork 7. Bolt and clamp 8. Lock pin 9. Magnetic tool
Remove countershaft (2) and mainshaft (1) by lifting out as
shown. Remove main and layshaft bearings (3). Remove differential assembly by lifting out.
1. Mainshaft
2. Countershaft
3. Bearings
Transmission
Loosen bolt (1) holding speedometer drive gear assembly (2)
and pull assembly out.
1. Bolt
2. Speedometer drive gear assembly
Remove bolt (1) holding shift lever (2) to shift shaft (3). Slide
shaft out of housing.
1. Bolt
2. Shift lever
3. Shift shaft
Remove two clips (1) holding throwout bearing (2) to clutch
lever (3), as shown. Remove bearing.
1. Clip
2. Throwout bearing
3. Clutch lever
212.00
Page 21-13
Page 21-14
Remove bolt (1) holding throwout bearing lever [2) to shaft
{3). Slide shaft out of housing and remove lever.
1. Bolt
2. Throwout bearing lever
3. Throwout lever shaft
Disassemble countershaft as follows, noting order for reassembly.
Remove fourth gear bushing (1) as shown.
Slide off fourth gear and syncro, third and fourth gear sleeve,
third and fourth gear center hub, third gear and syncro assembly, and third gear bushing.
Remove second gear bushing with puller.
Slide off second gear and syncro, first and second gear sleeve,
v
first and second gear center hub with syncro rings, first and
first gear bushing.
1. Fourth gear bushing
'
"9*
\\\_-
\\\\\\\\\ f
ti: '
‘(
H
\
INSPECTION
Main Case, Housing and Cover
Check main case for cracks. Check bearing seats for wear or damage that might cause bearing cups to rotate in theirseats.
Main case to housing and cover mating surfaces should not show signs of damage, otherwise assembly will be misaligned and oil
leakage will result.
Minor imperfections can be removed with a file.
in cases of extensive damage or excessive wear, replace affected parts.
Make sure oil breather opening on cover is not clogged.
NOTE: Upper and lower case sections are line bored matched, and as such are not interchangeable with a half from another
transmission.
Seals
Replace all seals.
Transmission
Shafts
212.00
Page 21 ~15
.
Inspect mainshaft gears for signs of chipping or excessive wear.
Countershaft surfaces must not be damaged or excessively worn.
Splines should be free from nicks and burns, so that hubs may slide freely.
measured
Check countershaft centering by placing it between two centers and rotating it by hand ; maximum permissible runout,
with dial indicator, is .001 in (.025 mm).
The surface of reverse shaft should be smooth and free from nicks and burrs.
up with extra-fine emery
Minor imperfections on working surfaces, that do not render parts unfit for service, may be dressed
cloth.
If shafts are badly distorted,
Minor distortions of shafts can be corrected with a small press, taking care not to damage surfaces.
they must be replaced.
Gears
surface. Inspect
Gears should not show damage or excessive tooth wear. Gear tooth contact pattern must extend to entire working
pattern for roughness or signs of excessive wear.
Gear lash should be .004 in (0.10 mm) for new parts; maximum allowable lash is .008 in (0.20 mm).
beyond specified
Fit clearance between bushings and countershaft gears is .001 to .003 in (0.04 to 0.08 mm). Replace gears worn
limits.
Hubs —- Sleeves — Synchronizer Rings
especially on sleeve slidCheck that sliding sleeve hubs for engagement of first-second, third-fourth and fifth gears are not nicked,
ing surface.
that mesh with sliding sleeves. Ring
Synchronizer rings must not be excessively worn, either on their inside surface or on teeth
must not be loose in its gear seat.
first and second gears; 2.607
The outside diameter of seated synchronizer ring when new is 3.004 1 .008 in (76.31 i 0.2 mm) for
gears.
1 .008 in (66.22 1' 0.2 mm) for third, fourth and fifth
When replacing a synchronizer ring, check that its diameter in its gear seat conforms to specifications.
If splined parts do not slide smoothly, remove imperfection with a fine file.
Parts worn beyond limits should be replaced.
Bearings
bearing firmly and turn it both ways to
Bearings must be in perfect condition. End play must not exceed .020 in (.050 mm). Hold
check for roughness.
Replace bearings that are not in perfect condition.
Rods — Forks
excessive play, in transmission case
Shift control forks should not be distorted and control rods should slide freely, but without
and housing guide holes.
Detent balls and rollers should slide freely in their seats.
Any sign of seizure could cause engagement or disengagement problems.
Wear patterns should be the same on both sides of forks.
REASSEMBLY
Reassemblv is reverse of disassembly with special attention to
following Notes, Cautions and Procedures.
CAUTION: During reassembly of countershaft, be certain that
first and second gear sliding sleeve hub reverse
gear (1) faces first gear as shown. If this part is to
be replaced, make certain that correct sliding
sleeve hub is installed since four speed transmission sliding sleeve hub can be installed, but is incorrect, and will result in locked transmission.
1. First and second gear sliding sleeve hub reverse gear
Installation of Shift Rods
Install support bracket (2) so that gear shift lever (B) is posi-
tioned as shown.
1. Selector lever
4. Pewl support
2. Support bracket 3. Reverse lockout pawl
5. Pewl return spring 6. Gear shift lever
Place forks ill in position on sliding sleeves/hubs.
Install first and second shift rod (2).
With magnetic tool {3), install lock pin (4) down into its slot
in bore as shown. Insure that pin is fully seated.
1. Fork
2. First and second shift rod
3. Magnetic tool
4. Lock pin
‘
Transmission
212.00
Page 21-1 7
Before installing third and fourth shift rod (1), install pin (2)
in rod as shown. Insert rod into bore.
1. Third and fourth shift rod
2. Pin
lllflth magnetic tool (1) insert last lock pin (2) as shown. Insure
that pin is fully seated.
Install reverse idler assembly (3) with fork (4) installed. Install
fifth and reverse shift rod.
1. Magentic tool
2. Lock pin
3. Reverse idler assembly
4. Fork
NOTE: 0n reassembly of fifth gear, synchro hub (2) oil groove
should face fifth gear (1) as shown.
1. Fifth gear
2. Synchro hub
3. Sliding sleeve
CAUTION: Position bearing snap rings (2) as shOWn or bearings will not seat properly.
1. Bearing
2. Snap ring
3. Mainshaft
4. Countershaft
To torque main and oountershaft Iocknuts, transmission must
first be locked-up.
Remove fifth speed fork (3) bolt and engage fifth speed manually by pressing hub (2) down.
Engage transmission in another gear by moving shift lever, this
will lock shafts.
Nuts can now be torqued to 86.8 ft lb (12 kgml as shown.
Disengage hub and reinstall fork bolt.
1.Locknut
2.Hub
3.Fork
DIFFERENTIAL
D ISASSEMB LY
To remove crown gear (4) remove eight bolts (6) attaching it
to case (2}.
1. Differential bearing 2. Differential case
4. Crown gear 5. Speedometer drive gear
3. Pinion shaft
Transmission
212.00
Page 21-19
To remove both differential bearings (4), use puller A.40005/
002 (1) together with arms A.40005/302 (2) and spacer
A.45023 (3) as shown.
1. Puller A.400051002
4. Bearing
2. Arms A.40005/302
3. Spacer A.45028
35051"
To remove speedometer drive gear (4), use puller A.40005/002
(1) together with arms A.40005/302 (2) and spacer A.45028
(3) as shown.
1. Puller AADDOSIDO‘Z
2. Arms A.40005/302
4. Speedometer drive gear
3. Spacer A.45028
35058
To remove differential pinion shaft (5) and gears (2 and 3),
drive out retaining pin (4) and then slide shaft out.
Remove gears through large opening in case (1).
1. Differential case
5. Pinion shaft
2. Side gear
3. Pinion gear
4. Retaining pin
Page 21-20
INSPECTION
Check teeth for scoring or signs of abnormal wear and make sure contact pattern extends to entire thrust surface.
If excessive wear is found, replace affected parts.
Gears with chipped teeth should be replaced and mating gears carefully examined for damage.
Inspect pinion shaft and pinion bores for scoring or nicks. Minor damage can be dressed off with extra-fine emery cloth;
otherwise replace parts. Follow a similar procedure for inspecting side gears and counterbores in case.
Inspect roller bearings, these should be in perfect condition with no signs of wear and should have perfectly smooth surfaces.
If
there is any doubt as to their serviceability, replace them, as faulty operation of hearings will result in gear noise and/or seizure.
Fl EASSE MB LY
Refit differential gears to case as follows; place side gears (1)
in case directly opposite each other, seated in their counterbores.
Place pinion gear in mesh with side gears.
Carefully rotate assembly so that pinion gear is directly opposite large opening in case and place second pinion gear in mesh.
1. Side gear
2. Differential case
Rotate assembly so that pinion shaft (3) can be inserted
through pinion gears.
Line up pinion shaft pin hole with hole in case and insert
retaining pin (2}.
1. fide gear
2. Retaining pin
3. Pinion shaft
Transmission
212.00
Page 21-21
Using a suitable installer. refit Speedometer drive gear,
Using installer A.70190 (1) refit bearing (2).
Install crown gear (5) with eight bolts (6).
1. Installer A.70190
2. Bearing
4. Speedometer drive gear
3‘ Differential case
5. Crown gear
6. Bolt
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
THROUGH FINAL DRIVE UNIT
Page 21-22
DIFFERENTIAL BEARING SETTING
NOTE: Bearing preload must not be changed unless the bearings or transmission housing has been replaced.
The bearing on the differential must be preloaded. Preload is obtained by placing shims between outer ring of the bearing and the
sealing cover. To set preload, do one of the following:
if fixture A.95655 is not available, place outer ring of carrier bearing in its seat. Place shims on top of bearing. Place retaining
flange on shims. Using feeler gauge measure clearance between flange and transmission housing. If clearance is not 0.003 to 0.005
in. (0.08 to 0.12mm), add or remove shims to obtain this clearance. Install two nuts on studs thru flange and tighten nuts. Turn
transmission one full turn to set bearings. Loosen nuts and check clearance. Install nuts on studs. Torque nuts to 18 ft. lbs. (2.5kgml.
1. Shims
2. Retaining flange
3. Transmission housing
4. Bearing
212.00
Transmission
Page 21-23/24
If fixture A.95655 is available, apply a load of 770 lbs. (350kg) to settle bearings. Place fixture A.95655 with dial indicator on
surface for sealing cover. Set dial indicator finger against outer ring of bearing. Zero indicator.
Without changing the indicator, place fixture on sealing cover with finger on cover and case surface. Value on indicator is differ-
ence between distance ”P" and height ”H".
Add 0.0031 in. (0.08mm) to value on indicator to determine thickness of shims. Choose a shim with a thickness as close as possible to this value.
0.60,
NOTE: Shims are supplied in the following thicknesses; 0.0196. 0.0236, 0.0275, 0.0315, 0.0354, 0.0394, 0.0433 in. {0.50,
0.70, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, 1.10mm).
2|???
2‘7 18
1. Bearing
2. Dial indicator
3. Transmission case
4. Differential case
5. Tool A.95655
6. Sealing cover
P = Distance between mounting surface for cover (6) and outer ring of bearing (1).
H = Height of sealing cover.
Gearshift Controls
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Unscrew gearshift knob (1 ).
Remove five screws (2 and 4) holding lower console (3).
Ti)! and of console up until it clears gearshift lever and lay it
to one side.
1. Gearshift knob 2. Screws'
3. Lower console 4. Screw
Remove three bolts (1) and washers retaining support (2).
1. Bolts
2. Support
Lift support. Remove nut (2) and bolt holding selector rod (1)
to gearshift lever (3). Lift gearshift lever out of vehicle.
1. Selector rod
2. Nut
3. Gearshift lever
212.21
Remove bolt (3} and nut holding transmission link (4) to transmission rod (2).
Remove boot (5]. Pull selector rod out of vehicle from rear.
NOTE: Transmission link on vehicles with carburetor does
not have flexible rubber coupling (1).
Install in reverse order.
1.Flexible coupling
5. Boot
2. Transmission rod
T33“
3. Bolt 4. Transmission link
19
f
21
20
22
3
2
1
1. Bolt
2. Bushing
3. Locknut and lockwasher
4. Gearshift lever
5. Gearshift knob
6. Gearshift boat
7. Bolt
3. Washer
9. Cover
10. Bushing
11. Grommet
12. Support
13. Plate
14. Nut
15. Transmission link
16. Washer
EXPLODED VIEW OF GEARSHIFI' CONTROL ASSEMBLY
(VEHICLES WITH CARBURETOFI)
17. Bushing
13. Bolt
19. Bolt
20. Clamp
21. Boot
22. Selector rod
212.21
Gearshift Controls
Page 21-27/28
ADJUSTING GEARSHIFI' LINKAGE
Place transmission in neutral.
Loosen two bolts (3) holding selector rod (4) to transmission
lint-2(2).
Shift transmission link in the elongated holes until gearshift
lever is in center of support and is straight up and down,
Tighten bolts.
NOTE: Transmission link on vehicles with carburetor does
not have flexible rubber coupling (1).
1. Flexibie coupling
2. Transmission link
3. Bolts
4. Selector rod
3“
I!
1E
7.:
9. Cover
1. Bolt
2. Bushing
3. Locltnut and Lockwasher
4.
5.
6.
7.
Gearshift lever
Gearshift knob
Gearshift boot
Bolt
8. Washer
‘IO. Bushing
11. Grommet
12.
13.
14.
15,
Support
Boot
Plate
Nut
3
_>2s
19
§\ 20
22
2f 1
3
18
.-'-
21
17. Washer
18. Bushing
19. Bolt
20. Plates
21. Bolt
22. Selector rod
16. Transmission link
EXPLODED VIEW OF GEARSHIFT CONTROL ASSEMBLY
(VEHICLES WITH FUEL INJECTION)
212.33
Speedometer Drive
Page 21-29/30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Unscrew speedometer cable (2) from speedometer drive
assembly (3).
Q
2
Remove locking bolt (1) holding speedometer drive in transmission housing. Withdraw speedometer drive assembly.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1 . Locking bolt
2. Speedometer cable
3. Speedometer drive assembly
‘9
/'
""-..
EEK»
77““721
274.02
Axle Shafts
Page 21-31
HALF—SHAFT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Raise vehicle and remove wheel.
Remove six Allen head bolts (2) at each end of half-shaft.
Remove hall-shaft (4) complete with CV joints (1 and 5).
NOTE: Discard Allen head bolts and replace with new ones
for installation.
Installation is reverse of removal. Torque new Allen head
bolts to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgml.
3. Protective boot 4. Half-shaft
tomuaaotgapoioa
. Clamp
. Protective boot
Clamp
Ring
Cover
. Washer
. Constant velocity joint
. Circlip
. Stub shah
. Allen bolt
N-‘O
.s-s.‘
1. Inner CV joint 2. Bolts
5. Outer CV joint
EXPLODED VIEW OF AXLE SHAFT
. Plate
. Half-shah
Page 21-32
CONSTANT VELOCITY JOINT
REMOVAL
To remove either CV joint. remove large clamp holding protective boot on CV joint.
Remove circlip (2) with pliers A. 31115 (1).
Slide CV joint off half-shaft (5).
1. Pliers A. 81115
5. Hail-shalt
2. Circlip
3. Spherical ball
4. Socket
INSTALLATIO N
Slide CV joint onto half-shaft (1). ensuring that side with
reference groove (5) faces toward and of shaft.
Install circlip on and of shaft with pliers A. 81115.
Grease CV joint socket and inside of protective boot (2). Use
no more than 3.2 025. (.10 kg) of grease.
Slide boot over joint and secure clamp (3) with pliers A.81118
l4!-
1. Half-shaft 2. Boot
5. Reference groove
3. Clamp
4. Pliers A.B111B
Service Tools
21A
Page 21 -33
A.70100 Tool for installing circlip in 5th gear synchromesh
unit
A.40005/003 Special puller and arms for removing differential
bearing inner race
A.45028 Knurled spacer for extraction of differential bearing
inner race
A.70190 Tool for fitting differential bearing inner race
A.55035 Spin wrench for removing bell housing to engine bolts
‘CTF‘T— _Fm-_\:-:-ar
lg,
—'—— ——_ 3
,
/
A5508? Ring spanner for oil level and drain plug of final drive
unit
A.70225/23 Tool for installing circlip on 3rd and 4th gear
synchrornesh units
Page 21-34
_
I“
\
_______m
.
*"fl
l
h»
A.70296 Tool for fitting gear selector rod oil seal.
__
.
a,l
(
A.70526 Engine support cross rail
A.70301 Pilot for fitting gear selector rod oil seal
\
a
m1 I
A.70575 Support used in conjunction with hydraulic jack
when removing or replacing transmission unit
A.70375 Pilot for fitting seal and bushing on CV joint rubber
protectors
A.71001/4 Transmission support for rotating stand Ar.22204
n" murmur“
m
AJOSTQ
A.70379 Tool for fitting oil seal on transmission front cover
A.81118 Pliers for fitting CV joint protector boot retaining
clamps
“’"
Service Tools
21A
Page 21-35/36
!_—-—
‘
‘
FIAT'SAT-AJBO‘IE
'
A.86016 Drift (16 mm) for fitting internal selector rod plugs
A31 124 Pliers for cv joint circlips
‘i‘
/ -
')
a"
‘0
Purser-masses
A.86014 Drift (14 mm) for fitting internal selector rod plugs
A.95655 Tool for determining thickness of differential bearing
adjusting shims
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
BRAKES - 33
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8r
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
Page
33
33
331 .01
331.02
331.17/.25
331.17
331.25
331.35
33A
Specifications ................................
Torque Specifications ..........................
Brake Pedal Mechanism ........................
Hydraulic Brake System ........................
Front and Rear Wheel Brakes ....................
Front Brake Calipers ..........................
Rear Brake Calipers ...........................
33—1
33-1
33-5
313-?
33-9
3343
33-15
Hand Brakes .................................
Service Tools ................................
33-17
33-19
33
Brakes
Page 33-1/2
SPECIFICATIONS
MM
IN.
DESCRIPTION
Disc brakes on all four wheels.
Type .......................................................
Disc diameter ..............................................
8.937
227
Disc thickness:
— When new .............................................
— Minimum after refacing ................................
— Minimum allowed for wear ............................
0.421 to 0.429
0.368
0.354
10.7 to 10.9
9.35
9
Maximum runout (at 2 mm from outer edge) ...............
0.010
0.25
Minimum permissible friction material thickness ..........
0.059
1.5
Caliper cylinder bore diameter:
— Front ...................................................
— Rear ...................................................
1.889
1.338
48
34
Master cylinder bore diameter .............................
3/4
19.05
Hand brake for parking .....................................
Mechanical, acting on rear wheels.
Brake fluid .................................................
DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid to
F.M.V.S.S. No. 116
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE FIGUR E
Kgm
Ft. Lb.
24.4
2.5
18
M 10 x 1.25
47
4.7
35
Bolt, hand brake support ...........................
M 8
15
1.5
11
Union bolt, front brake hose to caliper ..............
3/8 24 UNF
2A
28
2.8
20
DESCRIPTION
THREAD
Nut. master cylinder to pedal support bolt ..........
M 8
Bolt, brake caliper support bracket .................
N-m
#93919
m
:0
“_..
3511.12:
82%;}
r1"
Saga
..
2,
E
I11
r
a:
m
>
X
m
(D
$38???
(I:
g
8
3'
(1:
o
g.
:J
3?“:
SEMVHH
_
'1
17/ 8'88 959d
-1
OHnVHGAH
Egg-"aw
:7
O
¥TW¥~
QE¥§<
mm‘bmggamjm
GNV
3
O
Z
>
r7151
GNVH
HVEIH
SEDIVHEI TBEHM
g
m
Qua:
Brake Pedal Mechanism
BRAKE PEDAL ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Siphon fluid from brake and clutch reservoirs. Remove steering
column. Refer to 412.01.
Place a container on floor of vehicle to catch fluid. Disconnect
brake lines (3 and 7) from junction blocks (2 and 8). Cap lines.
Disconnect clutch line (1) from clutch master cylinder (6).
Cap line.
Remove wires (4) from brake light switch (5).
1. Clutch line 2. Junction block 3. Brake lines 4. Wires
5. Brake light switch 6. Clutch master cylinder 7. Brake line
8. Junction block
Remove two nuts (1) and washers holding pedal support
bracket (2) to firewall.
1. Nuts
2. Pedal support bracket
Lower pedal assembly far enough to allow removal of hose (5)
from clutch master cylinder (6) and hoses (2 and 4) from brake
master cylinder (3).
Remove screw from Strap (1) holding hoses to support bracket.
Remove pedal assembly from vehicle.
Install in reverse order. Use new hose clamps. Fill reservoirs.
bleed brake and clutch systems, and check for leaks.
1. Strap 2. Brake hose
5. Clutch hose
3. Brake master cylinder 4. Brake hose
6. Clutch master cylinder
331.01
Page 33—6
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
Remove cotter pin and washer from clevis pin (4). Pry clutch
master cylinder rod (5) off cievis pin.
Remove spring (1) from clutch pedal (6).
Remove not (2) and two washers from end of clutch pedal
shaft. Slide clutch pedal and shaft out of nylon bushing (3).
1. Clutch pedal spring 2. Nut 3. Bushing
5. Cylinder rod 6. Clutch pedal
4. Clevis pin
Take end of spring (5) out of pedal support bracket (6).
Remove screw (2) and retaining plate (3) holding nylon bushing (4). Slide bushing out of support bracket.
Remove brake pedal (1) with master cylinder rod attached.
Inspect nylon bushing and replace if worn excessively. Lubricate
all bearing surfaces with white grease and reassemble in
reverse order of disessembly.
1. Brake pedal
5. Spring end
2. Screw 3. Retaining plate 4. Bushing
6. Pedal support bracket
Hydraulic Brake System
331.02
Page 33-7
'.‘
MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove brake pedal assembly. Refer to 331 .01.
Disconnect three brake lines (1) from master cylinder (5).
Remove nuts from two bolts (4) holding master cylinder.
Remove bolts and junction block (2).
Pull master cylinder out and off of cylinder rod (3).
Install in reverse order, making sure all parts and fittings are
clean
1. Brake lines
22. Junction block
3. Cylinder rod
4. Bolts
5. Master cylinder
OVERHAUL
Remove two connectors (2) and seals (3).
Remove dust boot (4).
Remove two stop bolts (6) and seals (5);
Remove remaining internal parts (items 7 through 19) from Cylinder (1).
Carefully inspect cylinder bore and piston surfaces. They should have a mirror-like finish without any kind of roughness. The cylinder
bore can be honed to prevent leaks or excessive wear of seals and pistons. Do not increase size of bore. Replace seals and dustcovers.
Clean all parts with dental: red alcohol and lubricate with brake fluid. Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.
mumtnppufl
. Cylinder body
A Connector
Seal
Boot
Seal
. Stop bolt
. Seal
. Rear piston
Hmmtd-O-‘O
,5
oer
. 5:2:
. Spring and cup
. Spring
19 13 17
16
. Cup
. Flat washer
. Front piston
. Spring
woo
. Spring and cup
. Spacer
. Seal
EXPLODED VIEW OF MASTER CYLINDER
Page 33-8
BLEEDING
When the front or rear hydraulic system is opened for any reason, it must be bled to remove all entrapped air. The front and rear systems
are independent and need not be bled together. After all repairs are made, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Should the brake system have been completely drained, it is advisable to carry out the following operation before bleeding:
Loosen all wheel bleeder screws and pump brake pedal. as fluid begins to escape tighten bleeder screws.
Fill brake fluid reservoir with DOT 3 brake fluid.
Clean all dirt and foreign material from bleeder screws and remove protective cap.
Attach bleeder hose over bleeder fitting in brake caliper or wheel cylinder. Submerge other end of bleeder hose into a clean jar half filled
with brake fluid.
Loosen bleeder screw one or two turns and press brake pedal down, allowing it to return slowly; do this several times until no more air
bubbles escape from rubber hose.
Keeping brake pedal depressed, remove bleeder hose and tighten bleeder screw. Refit protection cap.
Repeat above on other wheels. making certain that fluid level in reservoir is maintained.
After bleeding, tap up reservoir to prescribed maximum level.
h.
Front and Rear Wheel Brakes
331.17/.25
Page 33-9
CALIPER AND PADS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove wheel.
Remove four cotter pins (2 and 5) from two caliper locking
blocks (3).
Use a drift to drive out looking blocks.
1. Support bracket
2. Cotter pins
3. Locking block
4. Caliper
5. Cotter pins
Separate caliper (6) from support bracket (1 ).
On front brakes. to remove caliper for replacement or overhaul. remove bolt (2) holding bracket (3) to caliper.
Remove union bolt (5) holding hose (4). Remove gaskets.
1. Support bracket
6. Caliper
2. Bolt
3, Bracket
4. Hose
5. Union bolt
On rear brakes. to remove caliper for replacement or overhaul, disconnect hose (1) from caliper (3). Remove gaskets.
Disconnect hand brake cable (2) from caliper.
1. Hose
2. Cable
3. Caliper 4. Support bracket
Page 33-10
Remove two brake pads (2).
Inspect two retainer Springs (1] and two caliper springs (3)
for breakage. Replace if necessary.
NOTE: Retainer springs on early type brake systems are a
different type than those illustrated. See exploded
view in Section 331.25.
install in reverse order.
1. Retainer spring
2. Brake pad
3. Caliper spring
Check disc (1) for runout by placing a dial indicator (2) 0.08 in.
(2 mm) from disc outer edge.
Runout must not be greater than 0.010 in. (0.25 mm), otherwise relaoe disc.
Thickness of disc after refacing must not be less than 0.368 in.
(9.35 mm}.
Minimum permissible thickness from Wear is 0.354 in. (9 mm).
Replace disc if less.
1. Brake disc
2. Dial indicator
Install in reverse order of removal.
If new brake pads are being installed, it will be necessary to fully seat
caliper pistons in bore in order to have installation clearance
for calipers. Push in on center of piston with blunt object (hammer
handle, etc.)
NOTE: Brake fluid will back up into master cylinder and may overflow
.
Place light coat of grease on locking blocks and contact surfaces of caliper
and support bracket.
After installing caliper. install lower locking block first, then with hand pressure
against front of caliper, force caliper back far enough
to insert top locking block. if caliper hydraulic lines have been disconnected,
bleed system (refer to BLEEDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM).
CAUTION: Before driving vehicle, pump brake pedal a few times to make
cerain caliper pistons are seated against pads and pedal
is firm.
Front and Rear Wheel Brakes
331.17/.25
Page 33-11/12
DISC AND BACKING PLATE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove caliper and pads. Refer to Caliper and Pads Removal
and Installation.
Remove caliper support bracket (1) by removing two bolts and
lockwashers on back face of bracket.
1. Caliper support bracket
2. Caliper
3. Disc
Remove locating pins (1). Remove disc (2).
To remove backing plate (3), remove bolt and washers.
Impact disc for scoring or cracks.
For runcut greater than 0.010 in. (0.25 mm) and/or scoring,
discs can be refaced to a minimum thickness of 0.368 in.
[9.35 mm).
Replace dises if cracked.
Install in reverse order. Torque caliper support bracket bolts to
35 ft. lbs. (4.8 kgm).
1. Locating pins
2. Disc
3. Backing plate
331.17
Front Brake Calipers
Page 33-1 3/14
OVERHAUL
Remove caliper. Reler to 331.17/.25
Remove dust boot (4).
Apply compressed air through brake fluid hose connection
to force piston (3) out of caliper (1).
WARNING: Apply air pressure gradually or piston will eject
at high velocity.
Remove seal (2).
Check piston and caliper cylinder for scoring or binding.
Install seal in caliper. Place piston in caliper. Push piston in
until it bottoms.
Install dust boot, making sure it is seated in groove in caliper
body.
2. Seal
3. Pismn
4. Dust boot
mascara-lows:-
. Lining retainer spring (early type)
_ Lining pad
, Caliper Support bracket
9
11
10
, Spring
. Lining retainer spring (late type)
Lining pad
Cotter pin
. Caliper locking block
. Dust cap
. Bleeder screw
_._._a_-_u
htIJN-‘O
1. Caliper
V Caliper body
. Piston
. Seal
. Dust boot
EXPLODED VIEW OF FRONT CALIPER AND BRACKET COMPONENTS
331.25
Rear Brake Calipers
_ _‘ .me
OVERHAUL
F
Remove caliper. Refer to 331 .17/.25.
l
Remove dust boot (1).
Unscrew piston (2) from plunger. Use screwdriver in slot.
Remove seal (3) from caliper (4).
1. Dust boot 2. Piston 3. Seal 4. Caliper
To disassemble hand brake mechanism. remove lock ring (7)
from shaft (1). Compress plunger (4) to relieve spring tension.
then remove shaft.
Remove plunger (4), seal (3) and spring washers (6).
To reassemble. place plunger with seal and spring washers
in caliper (8).
Place hand brake shaft in boot (2).
Place shaft and pawl (5) in caliper. install lock ring.
Cost lever and plunger with grease.
1. Shaft
2. Boot
7. Lock ring
3. Seal 4. Plunger 5. Few!
6. Spring washers
8. Caliper
Install seal in caliper cylinder.
Screw piston (1 ) on plunger until it is seated. Make sure mark (2)
on piston is on side of caliper (5) with bleed fitting (3).
Install rubber boot (4). Make sure boot is seated in groove
in caliper.
‘l. Piston
2. Mark
Page 33-15
3. Bleed fitting
4. Boot
5. Caliper
H
fem-1... , .
A
.
01
ill
Page 33-16
1. Cotter pin
2. Caliper locking block
3. Spring
4. Lining pads
5. Lining retainer spring
6. Rubber boot
7. Lock ring
8. Spacer
9. Hand brake shaft
10. Pawl
11. Plunger
12. Spring washer
13. Spring washers
14. Seal
15. Caliper cylinder
16. Piston
17. Seal
18. Dust boot
19. Complete caliper
20. Bleeder screw
21. Bleeder boot
22. Support bracket
EXPLODED VIEW OF REAR BRAKE CALIPER AND BRACKET COMPONENTS
331.35
Hand Brakes
Page 33-17/18
ADJUSTMENT
Press brake pedal a few times.
Starting from a released position. pull hand brake lever up
three or four clicks.
From under car, remove rubber cover. Loosen Iocknut (1).
Tighten adjusting nut (2) until wheels are locked (try to turn
wheels manually). Tighten locknut.
Release hand brake. Check that wheels are free to turn.
1. Lockout
2. Adjusting nut
1. Ratchet
9. Cable
2. Rod
3. Spring
4. Button
10. Boot
11. Caliper
12. Pulley
5. Rubber ring
6. Lever
13. Spacer
14. Gasket
7. Washer
15. Support
8. Bolt
16. Washer
17. Bolt
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Cable
Lockwasher
N ut
Clamp
Bolt
Nuts
Pin
EXPLODED VIEW OF HAND BRAKE LINKAGE
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31 .
32.
Clip
Washer
Swinging arm
Tie rod
Clip
Washer
Lock ring
Pin
Service Tools
33A
Page 33-19/20
A.56125
Wrench for brake line fittings
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
STEERING - 41
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8:
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
41
Specifications .......................................
41
412.01
412 .02
Torque Specifications ................................
Steering Column .....................................
Steering Box .........................................
41 A
Service Tools ........................................
Page
41 -1
41 -1
41 -3
41 -5
41 -9
41
Steering
Page 41-1
SPECIFICATIONS
Type ..................................................
Rack and pinion
Ratio:
— Steering wheel turns, lock to lock ...................
— Corresponding rack travel ..........................
3
4.6 in. (1 17 mm)
Pinion bearings .......................................
Two. ball type
Pinion adjustment:
H Early type ..........................................
.2 Late type ...........................................
By shims
By threaded retainer
Rack adjustment ......................................
By shims
Minimum diameter of turning circle ...................
32.5 ft. (9.9 m)
Tie rods ...............................................
Adjustable, with fixed end ball joints
Steering angles:
— Outer wheel ........................................
28°
— Inner wheel ........................................
32° 40‘
Front wheel toe-in ....................................
+3/32 to +5/64 in. (+2.5 to +6.0 mm]
Steering column .......................... . ...........
Breakaway type, two universal joints
Steering box capacity .................................
Steering box lubricant .................................
5.3 oz. (.127 kg)
SAE 90 EP oil or lithium-base grease
with molybdenum disulphide
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Ft. Lb.
49
5
36
49
5
36
35
3.5
25.
24.4
2.5
18
24.4
2.5
18
15
1.5
11
THREAD
N-m
Nut, steering wheel to column ....................
M 16 x 1.5
Nut, tie rod ball joint to rack ........................
M 14 x 1
Nut, self—locking, ball joint to
steering knuckle ............................... M 10 x 1.25
Nut, steering box to body bolt ......................
M 8
Nut, universal joint ................................
M 8
Nut, upper steering column support ...............
M 8
'
TORQUE FIGURE
Kgm
DESCRIPTION
Page 41—2
SECTION A-A
‘
_——-—'—A——"
=
[I —o'—
h—I
,
—'
=
I1
U . .4». W
'III'
[‘1
@
fl”?
‘
w
A = rack travel corresponding to 46 in. (117 mm)
@ M3121:
a: = 62° + 4" ball joint pin articulation angle
CROSS SECTION OF STEERING BOX
’1
,
J
Steering Column
STEERING WHEEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Center steering wheel and front wheels.
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Pry horn button off steering wheel (3).
Remove two horn button springs (4). Remove nut (1) holding
wheel (3) to shaft (2).
Mark steering wheel and steering shaft for installation reference. Pull wheel off shaft.
Install steering wheel in reverse order. Torque nut to 36 ft. lbs.
(5 kgm).
1. Nut
2. Steering shaft
3. Steering wheel
4. Horn button springs
STEERING COLUMN
REMOVAL AND INSTALtATION
Center steering wheel and front wheels.
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Remove four screws (2 and 3) to remove upper and lower
steering column covers (1).
1. Steering column covers
2. Screws
3. Screw
Remove two nuts (1 ) and washers and two bolts (2) and washers
holding steering column support (3) to dash board.
Lower column slightly and disconnect five electrical connectors
at dash board.
Rest steering column on floor.
1. Nuts
2. Bolts
3. Steering column support
412.01
Page 41-3
Page 41 -4
Mark universal joint (2) and steering box shaft {4) for installation reference.
Remove bolt and nut (31 holding universal joint to steering
box shaft. Slide universal joint off shaft.
install in reverse order. Make sure steering wheel is centered
with front wheels. Torque nuts and bolts to specifications.
1. Lower shaft
2. Universal joint
3. Nut
4. Steering box shaft
1. Lockwasher
2. Nut
. Steering wheel
12. Bushing
3, Bolt
4. Washer
13. Horn contact
14, Bushing
5. Retainer
6. Nut
7. Lockwasher
15. Upper shaft
16 Bushing
17, Bolt
8. Washer
9. Support
10. Nut
EXPLODED VIEW OF STEERING COLUMN
18. Lower shaft
19. Steering box
Steering Box
412.02
Page 41 -5
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Center steering wheel and front wheels.
Mark universal joint (1) and steering box shaft (3) for installation reference.
Remove bolt and nut (2) holding universal joint to steering
box shaft.
1. Universal joint
2. Nut
3. Steering box shaft
Raise front of vehicle.
Remove nut holding ball joint on tie rod(1)to steering knuckle(3).
Install puller A.47035 (2) on ball joint. Tighten bolt on puller
to separate ball joint from steering knuckle. Repeat for other
side.
1. Tie rod
2. Puller A4703?)
3. Steering knuckle
From inside vehicle, remove nuts from four bolts (1) holding
steering box {2) to body. Remove steering box from vehicle.
Install in reverse order. Torque nuts and bolts to specifications.
Check front wheel toe. Refer to 443.01.
1. Bolts
2. Steering box
Page 41-6
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
““
Remove four clamps (8. 6 and 16). Remove rubber boots (7 and 17). Unscrew two ball joints (5) from rack (19).
Remove two bolts (9), cover (10), shim (1 ). spring (12), seal (13) and thrust block (14).
On early type box, remove two bolts (27). seal (26), cover (25), plate (24), shim (23), bearing (22) and pinion (21 ).
0n late type box, remove threaded retainer (2) with seal (1 ), lock ring (3). bearing (4) and pinion (21).
On all steering boxes, slide rack (19) from housing (15). Remove bushing (18) from rack.
Remove bearing (20) from housing.
Before reassembly, coat all bearing and gear surfaces with 90 W oil or pack rack and pinion housings and boots with a total of 5.3 oz.
(.127 kg) of lithium—base grease containing molybdenum disulphide.
Reassemble in reverse order. Use tool A.74247 to install bushing (18). Ensure that tab on bushing aligns with slot (28) in housing.
Perform pinion and rack adjustments.
18
EARLY TYPE
22
'
LATE TYPE
1. Seal
. Housing
2. Retainer
16. Clamp
3. Lock ring
4. Bearing
17. Rubber boot
18. Bushing
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Ball joint
Clamp
Rubber boot
Clamp
Bolt
Rack
Bearing
Pinion
Bearing
Shim
10. Cover
24. Plate
11. Shim
25. Cover
12. Spring
13. Seal
26. Seal
27. Bolt
14. Thrust block
_
.
“
28. Slot for tab on bushing 18
EXPLODED VIEW OF STEERING BOX
412.02
Steering Box
Page 41.7
INSPECTION (Refer to illustration on previous page)
Before inspection, clean all metallic parts in a suitable degreaser. Blow dry.
Inspect rack(19), pinion (21 ), bearing (20) and housing (1 5) for wear, scratches. broken teeth or other damage. Replace entire steering
box if damaged.
Inspect rubber boots (7 and 17) for tears or breaks that would permit moisture entry. Replace if damaged.
bearing (4 or 22)
inspect bushing (18) and thrust block (1 4) for wear or breaks. Feplace if damaged. Replace spring (1 2) if worn. InSpect
own weight.
their
under
(all
not
should
They
for wear. Replace if damaged. Check that ball joints (5) move freely in all directions.
Replace ii worn.
Replace seal (1 or 26) if worn or damaged.
ADJUSTMENTS
Pinion (Early Type)
Remove two bolts. cover with seal, plate, and shim to gain
access to pinion bearings.
Carefully install shims so they are centered on the pinion.
install plate. cover with seal. and two bolts.
Pinion (Late Type)
With threaded retainer installed over pinion, torque retainer
to 22 to 25 ft. lbs. (3.0—3.5 kgm).
Check initial turning torque of pinion. Torque should be 4.3 to
14.0 inch lbs. (0.05 to 0.16 kgm).
Stake retainer.
1. Torque wrench
2. Socket
Jr
(dimension X).
To dimension X, add 0.003 t 0.002 in. (0.078 f 0.053 mm).
Combine shims to make up new dimension. Shims available
are 0.0047, 0.008, 0.010. and 0.020 in. (0.12, 0.20, 0.25, and
0.50 mm).
I
Measure distance from top of bearing to pinion cover facing
/
C
Ix
Using a suitable driver. make sure bearing is firmly seated.
\
i
\
Page 41-8
Hack
Center the rack in its travel.
Remove two bolts. cover, shims. and spring to gain access
to rack trust block.
While
holding
rack trust
block
against
through 180° in both directions to settle fit.
rack, turn pinion
Measure distance from top of rack thrust block to cover facing
#
{dimension Y).
To dimension Y, add 0.0035 1 0.0015 in. (0.09 1 0.04 mm).
Combine shims to make up new dimension. Shims available
are 0.0039 and 0.0059 in. (0.10 and 0.15 mm).
install spring. shims. cover, and two bolts.
LUBRICATION
If steering box is being lubricated with grease. lubricate as
specified in STEERING BOX DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY.
if steering box is being lubricated with oil. check that steering
box {rubber boots) is empty of oil.
Turn steering fully to the right.
Lift up left side of steering box.
Loosen clamp on left rubber boot.
Using a syringe, add 5.3 oz. [.127 kg) of 90 W oil to left rubber
boot.
Tighten clamp.
ALIGNMENT
After the steering box has been installed. set toe-in as specified
in SUSPENSION section.
%
K L
\
\
f "‘
l
x
Y
Q
\
\
A
A.47038
Puller for separating tie rod ball joints
A.74247
Tool for fitting rack bush
41A
Page 41-9/1 O
_'
-
Service Tools
v.--.- .-
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND WHEELS
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
SUSPENSION - 44
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8:
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
44
44
443.01
443.02/.06
443.05
Specifications .......................................
Torque Specifications ................................
Front Suspension ....................................
Front and Rear Shock Absorbers and Bars ..............
Rear Suspension .....................................
Page
44-1
44-2
44-3
44-1 5
44-1 9
44A
Service Tools ........................................
44-29
44
Suspension
Page 44-1
SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT SUSPENSION
Type: lndpendent, control arm. strut bar, knuckle pillar and strut assembly with integral shock
absorber and coil spring.
Caster: Unladen ..................................
— Adjustment by shims set between reaction
struts and supports
Camber: Unladen. ................................
— Non-adjustable
Toe-in1Unladen ..................................
— Adjustment through threaded tie rods on
each end of steering box
‘
Coil Springs:
— Yellow-marked spring (1): length under a
load of 474 lbs..... .........................
— Green-marked Spring (1): length under a
load of474 lbs.............................
— Lowest load permissible to compress spring
to a length of 6.693 in. (1 70 mm) ..........
+6°10' to +7°20
I
0° to -1°
+3/32 to +15/64 in. (+2.5 to +6.0 mm)
>6.693 in. (>170 mm)
<6.693 in. (<170 mm)
441 lbs. (200 kg)
REAR SUSPENSION
Type: Independent, control arm, knuckle pillar and strut assembly with integral shock absorber and
coil Spring. Adjustable cross tie rods.
Camber: Unladen .................................
— Non-adjustable
Toe-in: Unladen ..................................
— Adjustment by threaded sleeves on tie rods
Coil springs:
— Yellow-marked spring (l): length under a
load of 562 lbs-(255 kg) ...................
— Green~marked spring (l): length under a
load of 562 lbs. (255 kg) ...................
— Lowest load permissible to compress spring
to a length of 7.874 in. (200 mm) ..........
-0°45' to -1°45'
+13/64 to +11/32 (+5.0 to +8.5 mm)
>7.874 in. (>200 mm)
<7.874 in. (< 200 mm)
518 lbs. (235 kg)
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel rim type ...................................
Tires:
— Type: ..........................................
~ Inflation pressure:
Front ....................
Rear .....................
(‘) Springs must always be fitted in matched pairs.
5J x 13 in.
165/70 SR 13 in.
29 psi (2.0 kg/cm’)
32 psi (2.2 kg/cmz)
Page 44-2
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
DESCRIPTION
TORQUE FIGURE
THREAD
N -m
Stud bolt, wheel ...................................
M 12 x 1.25
87
Nut, wheel hub (stake) .............................
M 20 x 1.5
216
22
balljoint ........................................
M 12 x 1.25
79
8
58
Nut, self-locking, strut bar to support ..............
MI 12 x 1.25
69
7
51
Nut, strut bar to control arm ........................
M 12 x 1.25
69
7
51
Nut, self-locking control arm to body ...............
M 10 x 1.25
40
4
29
Nut, strut assembly upper mount
to body .........................................
M 6
1
7
Nut, self-locking, strut assembly to
steering knuckle bolt ...........................
M 10 x 1.25
59
6
43
Nut, strut assembly top mounting ..................
M 12 x 1.25
59
6
43
Stud bolt, wheel ...................................
M 12 x 1.25
87
9
64
Nut, stub shaftlstake) ..............................
M 20 x 1.5
216
22
159
Nut, self—locking, control arm pivot bolt .............
M 14 x 1.5
98
10
72
Nut, self-locking, ball jointto pillar ..................
M 14 x 1.5
83
Nut, self-locking, tie rod to control
arm bolt ........................................
M 14 x 1.5
69
Nut, self-locking, strut assembly upper
mount to body ..................................
M 6
Kgm
Ft. Lb.
FRONT SUSPENSION
Nut, self-locking, steering knuckle
9
9.5 .
64
159
REAR SUSPENSION
Nut, self-locking, strut assembly to
9.5
8.5 4.!
'
61.5
7
51
1
7
pillar bolt .......................................
M 10 x 1.25
59
6
43
Nut, strut assembly top mounting ..................
M 12 x 1.25
59
6
43
Ring nut, wheel bearing, (stake) ....................
M 75 x 1.5
59
6
43
1|
5
Front Suspension
443.01
Page 44-3
R EM OVAL
Remove wheel.
It brake caliper (1) needs inspection, leave caliper attached to
suspension.
To do this, plug outlet from brake fluid reservoir and disconnect
brake fluid hose (2) from caliper.
To remove caliper from suspension, refer to 331.17/.25.
1. Caliper
2. Brake hose
Remove bolts (5) and plate holding strut bar (3) to control arm(4).
Remove bolt (2) holding control arm to bracket (1).
1. Bracket
2. Bolt
3. Strut bar
4. Control arm
5. Bolts
Remove nut l1) holding tie rod ball joint (3) to steering arm (2).
Use tool A.47038 to separate ball joint from arm.
1. Nut 2. Steering arm
3. Ball joint
Page 44—4
Disconnect strut assembly (1] by removing three nuts (2) and
washers.
1 . Strut assembly
2. Nuts
Lower suspension assembly out of vehicle.
To replace coil Springs. refer to 443.02/.06.
If hub bearing must be replaced. refer to STEERING KNUCKLE
OVERHAUL in this section.
1. Strut assembly
4. Control arm
2. Steering arm
3. Steering knuckle
INSTALLATION
Place suspension assembly in vehicle. install washers and
g nuts {2) on three bolts on tap of strut assembly (1).
Torque nuts to 7 ft. lbs. (1 kgml.
1 . Strut assembly
2. Nuts
Front Suspension
443.01
Page 44-5
Place control arm (4) in bracket (1).
Install bolt (2). washer and nut.
Place strut bar (3) on control arm. Place plate on strut.
Install bolts (5) through strut bar and control arm and install
nut.
1. Bracket
2. Bolt
3. Strut bar
4. ControI arm
5. Bolts
Place tie rod ball joint (3) in steering arm (2).
Install nut (1). Torque nut to 36 ft. lbs. (5 kgm).
Install brake caliper. If caliper was disconnected, attach brake
hose and bleed brakes.
Install wheel.
1. Nut
2. Steering arm
3. Ball joint
Lower vehicle. With vehicle on ground, torque bolt (1) and
nuts (2 and 3) to specifications.
1. Bolt
2. Nut
3. Nut
Page 44-6
Section through shock
absorber top mouniing.
CROSS SECTION OF FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Suspension
443.01
Page 44-7
STEERING KNUCKLE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Raise vehicle and remove wheel.
Remove bolts (1) holding caliper support (2) to knuckle (3).
Remove caliper support with caliper attached without disconnecting brake hose. Wire assembly out of way.
Remove disc and backing plate. Refer to 331 .17/.25.
l. Bolts
2. Caliper support
3. Knuckle
Remove nut (3) holding lower ball joint (1) to knuckle (2).
Separate ball joint from knuckle.
1. Ball joint
2. Knuckle
3. Nut
Remove nut (4) holding tie rod ball joint (6) to steering arm (5).
Separate ball joint from arm.
Remove two nuts (2) and bolts attaching strut assembly (1)
to knuckle (3).
Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal. Torque bolts and nuts to
specifications.
‘I. Strut assembly
6. Ball joint
2. Nuts
3. Knuckle
4. Nut
5. Steering arm
Page 44-8
OVERHAUL
Unstake and remove hub out (1}. Remove washer (2) with
gasket attached‘
1, Nut
2. Washer
3. Steering knuckle
Use a puller {3) or press to remove hub (1) from knuckle (2).
1. Hub
2. Knuckle
3. Puller
If bearing inner race (2) remains on hub (1). drive race off hub
far enough to attach a puller (3), and remove race from hub.
A press may also be used.
_.__-,_,‘__i.
_‘___
1. Hub
2. Inner race
3. Puller
443.01
Front Suspension
Page 44-9
1'1
Remove internal lock ring (2) from knuckle (1).
'
1. Knuckle 2. Lock ring
Remove thrust ring from inner side of knuckle.
“K
Place a suitable mandrel [2) on bearing inner race.
Use a puller (3) or press to remove bearing assembly from
knuckle {1).
1. Knuckle
2. Mandral
.
‘\
3. Puller
pmwummhpnd
. Steering knuckle
. Thrusr ring
Nut
. Washer
. Gasket
. Bearing
.a
. Gasket
. Lock ring
. Thrust ring
Hm
EXPLODED VIEW OF STEERING KNUCKLE
3-
Page 44-10
To reassemble knuckle [1), place bearing assembly in outer
side of knuckle.
Place a suitable mandrel (2) on hearing inner race.
Use a puller (3) or press to install bearing assembly in knuckle.
Press bearing in until seated against lip in knuckle.
1. Knuckle
2. Mendrel
3. Puller
Install internal lock ring (1) in groove in knuckle (2) Install
inside and outside (3) thrust rings in knuckle.
1. Lock ring
2. Knuckle
3. Thrust ring
install gasket (1) on hub shaft [3]. Use a puller (2) or press to
press hub into place.
1. Gasket
2. Fuller
3. Hub shaft
Front Suspension
Install gasket (2), washer (3) and nut (4) on hub shaft (1).
Torque nut to 159 ft. lbs. (22 kgm). Stake nut.
1. Hub shaft
2. Gasket
3. Washer
4. Nut
CONTROL ARM
INSPECTION
Ii control arm ball joint is worn, replace entire control arm.
Check control arm (1) for cracks or signs of distortion. Replace
if damaged.
Check swivel joint (2) and protective boot (3) for cracks or
breaks that might permit mositure or dirt entry. Replace
entire control arm if damaged.
Check rubber bushings (4) for wear or deterioration. Overhaul
control arm if damaged.
1. Control arm
2. Swivel joint
3. Boot 4. Bushing
OVERHAUL
Using a drill press. machine off paened area of spacer (either
and) as shown.
Using a press. drive out Spacer first. then remove rubber bushing.
443.01
Page 44-11
Page 44-12
Coat new bushing (4) with silicone grease. Using assembly
tool A‘74225 (items 1. 2 and 5). install new bushing (4) into
control arm (3).
1. Installer. tool A.74225 2. Pilot. tool A7422?)
4. Rubber bushing 5. Base. tool, A.74225
3, Control arm
Assemble spacer (71 on installer (1), then screw on tip (6).
Coat new Spacer (7) with silicone grease.
Using assembly tool A.74255 (items 1, 2, 5, 6 and 7), install
new spacer {7) into bushing i4).
Position washers on both ends of spacer, then peen over
spacer to lock washers in place.
memeeewe
1. installer, tool A.74255 2, Pilot, tool A.74255 3. Control arm
4. Rubber bushing 5. Base. tool A74255 6. Tip. tool A.74255
I Spacer
Nut
Washer
Bushing
Spacer
Bolt
. Steering knuckle
Nut
. Control arrn
EXPLODED VIEW OF CONTROL ARM COMPONENTS
Front Suspension
443.01
Page 44-1 3/14
FRONT SUSPENSION ALIGNMENT
Before aligning the front suspension, it must be checked for possible worn or misadjusted components. Check the following:
r Tire pressure (29 psi front, 32 rear).
— Tire radial and lateral rmout. Runout should be less than 0.118 in. (3 mm).
— Wheel bolt tightness.
—
—
—
—
—
Wheel bearing end play (if perceptible). bearing may be worn. or bearing may need tightening).
Lower ball joint (may be worn). Also check ball joint nut tightness. Torque should be 58 ft. lbs. (8 kgm).
Control arm to chassis mounting nut tightness. Torque should be 29 ft. lbs. (4 kgm).
Control arm rubber bushings for deterioration (overhaul or replace control arm).
Strut assembly to knuckle nut tightness. Torque should be 43 ft. lbs. (6 kgm).
— Steering box tie rod ball joints (replace if worn).
Caster
(Unladen)
+6°10‘ to +7°20‘ (+6°45‘ preferred)
To adjust, vary thickness of shims (1) at front of
strut bar (2).
Camber
(Unladen)
0° to -1° (-Vz° preferred)
Non-adjustable
2. Strut bar
1. Shims
Toevin
(Unladen)
+3/32 to +15/64 in. (+2.5 to +6.0 mm)
(+5/32 in., +4.0 mm preferred)
To adjust. make sure steering box and steering
wheel are centered. then loosen nut (1). Turn
steering box ball joint (2) in or out to obtain ad-
justment. Tighten nut. Repeat for other side.
1. Nut.
2. Ball joint
H4
Front and Rear Shock Absorbers and Bars 443.02/.06
Page 44—15
STRUT ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Flem0ve three nuts (2) and washers holding strut assembly
(1] at top.
1. Strut assembly
2, Nuts.
Remove two nuts (2) and bolts attaching strut assembly (1)
to su3pension.
Remove strut assembly from vehicle.
Install in reverse order. Torque upper mount nuts to 7 ft. lbs.
(1 kgml and lower mount nuts to 43 ft. lbs. (6 kgm).
1. Strut assembly
2._Nuts
COIL SPRINGS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Set up strut assembly (1 ) in coil Spring compressor A.74277 (2).
1. Strut assembly
2. Tool A7427?
Page 44-1 6
12
1. Nut
2. Lockwasher
3. Washer
4. Nut
5. Cup
5. Pad
7. Rubber pad
8. Plate
9. Rubber ring
10. Spring
11.. Rubber ring
12. Shock absorber
13. Nut
14. Bolt
14
EXPLODED VIEW OF STRUT ASSEMBLY
Front and Rear Shock Absorbers and Bars
Tighten three spring plate bolts (1) until they contact spring
plate (2) on strut assembly.
Crank tool A.74277 until spring (3) is compressed about one
inch.
1. Spring plate bolts
2. Spring plate
3. Spring
Using a shank wrench (3) to hold shock absorber stud. remove
nut holding support to shock absorber.
Carefully uncrank tool A.74277 until spring is fully relaxed.
Remove strut assembly from tool A7427? and separate parts.
To install coil spring, reverse removal procedure. Torque nut
to 43 ft. lbs. (6 kgm).
1. Spring plate bolts
2. Spring plate
3. Shank wrench
FRONT STRUT BAR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove nut (5). two bolts (3) and plate (2) attaching strut bar
(1) to control arm (4).
‘l. Strut bar
2. Plate
3. Bolt
4. Control arm
5. Nut
443.02/.06
Page 44-17
Page 44-18
Remove nut l1}, outer washer (2) and rubber grommet (3)
tron-i end of strut bar {4).
Remove strut from vehicle.
Install in reverse order, Torque nuts and bolts to specifications
Check wheel alignment.
1. Nut
2. Washer
3. Rubber grommet 4. Strut bar
12 13
14
15
1. Nut'
6. Lockwasher
11. Lockwasher
2. Washer
15. Nut
7. Bolt
12. Bolt
3. Cup
8. Rubber ring
13. Bolt
16. Bolt
17. Washer
4. Rubber pad
5. Spacer
9. Strut bar
'
10. Lock plate
14. Pillar
18. Support
EXPLODED VIEW OF STRUT BAR ATTACHMENTS TO BODY AND CONTROL ARM
Rear Suspension
443.05
Page 44-19
R EM OVAL
Remove wheel.
if brake caliper (2) needs inspection, leave caliper attached
to suspension.
To do this, plug outlet from brake fluid reservoir and disconnect
hose (1) from caliper.
To remove caliper from suspension, refer to 331.17/25.
1. Hose
2. Caliper
3. Cable
Remove six Allen bolts (1i attaching half-shaft outer CV joint
(2) to stub shaft.
1. Allen bolts
2. Outer CV joint
Remove catalytic converter. Refer to 10258.
Note number and position of shims at front control arm mounting point.
Remove nut, washer and bolt (2) holding control arm (1) to
bracket (3) at front of suspension.
Retain shims between arm and bracket.
1. Control arm
2. Bolt
3. Bracket
Page 44-20
Note number and position of shims at rear control arm mount:
ing point.
Remove nut washer, and bolt (2) holding control arm to bracket
(3) at rear of suspension.
1. Control arm
2. Bolt
3. Bracket
Remove 3 nuts (1) and washers holding strut assembly (2)
at top.
Remove suspension assembly from vehicle.
To replace coil spring. refer to 443.02/.06.
1. Nuts
2. Strut assembly
INSTALLATION
Place suspension assembly in vehicle. Install washers and
nuts (1 l on three bolts on too of strut assembly (2).
Torque nuts to 7 ft. lbs. (1 kgm).
1. Nuts
2. Strut assembly
Rear Suspension
443.05
Page 44-21
Install shims noted during removal between control arm (3)
and front and rear mounting brackets (2 and 4).
Install bolts, nuts (1) and washers holding control arm to
brackets.
NOTE: Torque control arm nuts to 72 ft. lbs. (10 kgm) when
installation is complete and vehicle is on ground.
Install catalytic converter.
1. Nut
2. Front bracket
3. Control arm
4, Rear bracket
Install six new Allen bolts (1) to attach half-shaft outer CV
joint (2) to hub shaft.
Torque bolts to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgm).
Install brake caliper.
If caliper was left on suspension, connect hose and parking
brake cable, Bleed caliper. Check wheel alignment.
1. Allen bolts
2. Outer CV joint
HEAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
install and adjust alignment equipment. Follow instructions
provided with equipment.
Set up equipment to check camber.
Camber should be -O°45' to -1°45‘.
Check toe-in.
Toe—in. unladen vehicle, should be +13/64 to +11/32 in.
(5.0 to 8.5 mm).
Adjust toe-in by lengthening or shortening rear tie rod (1).
1. Rear tie rod
Page 44-22
1. Shock absorber front mounting
adiustment shims.
2‘ Shock absorber rear mounting
adjustment shims‘
CROSS SECTION OF REAR SUSPENSION
, 443.05
Rear Suspension
Page 44-23
CONTROL ARM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove rear suspension from vehicle. Refer to REAR SUSPENSION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION.
Unstake stub shaft nut (1). Remove nut, washer and stub
shaft from pillar.
Remove nut (4) washer and bolt attaching rear tie rod (6) to
control arm (5).
Remove cotter pin and nut (7) holding tie rod ball joint (8) and
remove ball joint from pillar.
Remove nut (3) holding lower ball joint (2) to pillar (9). Separate
ball joint from pillar.
Remove control arm.
Installation is reverse of removal. Torque nuts and bolts to
specifications. Stake stub shaft nut.
1. Nut
3. Nut
2. Bell joint
4. Nut
5. Control arm
6, Tie rod
7. Nut 8. Ball ioint 9. Pillar
2 3
1
Q
15
1.
2.
3.
4.
Nut
Washer
Washer
Washer
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bolt
Nut
Washer
Washer
9.
10.
11.
12.
Bolt
Pillar
Nut
Boot
EXPLODED VIEW OF CONTROL ARM
13. Bushing
14. Control arm
15. Bushing
Page 44—24
REAR PlLLAFl
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove wheel. Remove bolts holding brake caliper support
to pillar.
Remove caliper support with caliper attached without disconnecting brake hose and hand brake cable. Wire assembly
out of way.
Remove disc and backing plate. Refer to 331.25.
Remove six Allen bolts (1) attaching half—shaft outer CV joint
[2) to stub shaft.
NOTE: Discard Allen bolts and replace with new ones for
installation. Torque nuts to 31 ft. lbs. (4.3 kgm).
1. Allen bolts
2. Outer CV joint
Unstake stub shaft nut (1).
Remove nut, washer and stub shaft from pillar (2).
1. Nut
2. Pillar
Remove two nuts (2) and bolts attaching strut assembly to
pillar (1}.
1. Pillar
2. Nuts
Rear Suspension
443.05
Page 44-25
Remove nut [‘l) holding lower ball joint (2) to pillar (4).
Tilt pillar outward and separate ball joint from pillar.
Remove cotter pin and nut holding rear tie rod ball joint (3)
to pillar. Separate ball joint from pillar.
Remove pillar from vehicle.
Installation is reverse of removal. Torque nuts and bolts to
Specifications. Stake stub shaft nut.
1. Nut
2. Ball joint
3. Ball joint
4. Pillar
OVERHAUL
Remove thrust ring (1) from pillar (2).
l. Thrust ring
2. Pillar
Place 3 Suitable mandrel (2) on hub (1).
Use a puller (41 or press to press hub out of inner race and
out of pillar (3).
1. Hub
2. Mandrel
3. Pillar
4. Puller
Page 44-26
If bearing inner race [2) remains on hub (1 ). drive race off hub
far enough to attach to puller (3), and remove race from hub.
A press may also be used.
1. Hub
2. Inner race
3. Puller
Unstake ring nut (21.
Use tool AS7149 (3) to remove ring nut from pillar (1).
1, Pillar
2. Ring mu
3. Tool A.57149
.owmrdsnrakwro“
. Stub shaft
. Pillar
Seal
.-
. Bearing
Plate
Hing nut
Seal
Hub
. Washer
Nu!
EXPLODED VIEW OF REAR PILLAR
Rear Suspension
Place tool A.74377 (2) on bearing inner race.
Use a puller (3] or press to remove bearing assembly from
pillar“).
1. Pillar
2. Tool A1437?
3. Puller
To reassemble. place bearing assembly (2) on pillar (1).
Use tool A7437? (3) and a puller (4) or press to install bearing
assembly in pillar.
1. Pillar
2. Bearing assembly
3, Tool A.74377
4. Puller
Screw a new ring nut (13) into pillar (2).
Using tool AS7149 (l) and a torque wrench (4), torque nut
to 43 ft. lbs. (6 kgm).
Stake nut.
1. Tool A57149
2. Pillar
3. Ring out
4. Torque wrench
443.05
Page 44-27
Page 44-28
Support bearing inner race with tool A.74377 (3).
Use a driver [5} to install hub (4) into pillar (2). A press may
also he used.
Install thrust plate.
1. Seal
2. Pillar
3. Tool A7437?
4, Hub
5. Driver
44A
Service Tools
A.47038
Puller for separating tie rod ball joints
AS7149
Rear pillar ring nut wrench
A7425?)
Tool for inserting front control arm rubber bushings
A7427?
Coil spring compressor
A7437?
Tool for removing and refitting rear pillar bearing
Page 44—29/30
A. 57149
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
BODY
70
70
ACCESSORIES - 50
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8:
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
Page
501.01
501.03
Ventilation and Heating ...............................
Air Conditioning .....................................
50—1
50-5
Ventilation and Heating
501.01
Page 50-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Insufficient heat or ventilation may be caused by problems other than a faulty heater. Before disassembly, check for the following:
Leaves or other debris blocking radiator.
Leaves or other debris blocking fresh air inlet.
Faulty coolant thermostat.
Blown fuse or faulty electrical system components.
Low coolant level.
Kinked or otherwise blocked heater hoses.
Cooling system contamination.
CONTROL PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Remove radio knobs.
Remove two nuts (3) and washers retaining radio.
Remove radio fascia panel (2) and remove radio.
Remove tour knobs [4) from levers.
Remove control panel fascia panel (5).
Remove and disconnect clock (1). or remove clock opening
cover plate.
1. Clock
2. Fascia panel
3. Nuts
4. Knobs
5. Fascia panel
Remove screw [3) holding control panel (2) to support (6).
Remove four screws [4 and 5) holding support to instrument
panel (1}.
Maneuver support out of instrument panel. leaving control
panel in position.
'I.|nstrument panel
6. Support
2, Control panel
3. Screw
4. Screws
5. Screw
Remove connectors (1) from fan switch and light.
Remove three screws (3) and clamps holding cables (4).
Disconnect cables from levers (5) and remove control panel (2).
install in reverse order.
1. Electrical connectors
4. Cables
2. Control panel assembly
5. Levers
3. Screws
BLOWER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Disconnect end of cable (4) from heater door (5) and remove
screw and clamp (1) holding cable to |owar housing (3).
Pull cable out of lower housing.
At left side of housing, disconnect three blower leads.
Remove four clips (2 and 6) holding lower housing.
Maneuver lower housing out of vehicle complete with duct
for center vents.
1.Clamp
2.Clip
3.Lowerhousing
4.Cable
5.Healerdoor
Remove blower fan shroud.
Remove tvvo clips (3) holding blower assembly (2).
Remove blower assembly from lower housing (1).
Install in reverse order.
1. Lower housing
2. Blower assembly
3. Clip
6.Clip
Ventilation and Heating
501.01
Page 50-3
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Drain cooling system.
Disconnect end of cable (4) from heater door (5) and remove
screw and clamp (1) holding cable to lower housing (3).
Pull cable out of lower housing.
At left side of housing. disconnect three blower leads.
.
Remove four clips (2 and 6) holding lower housing.
Maneuver lower housing out of vehicle complete with duct
for center vents.
LCIamp
2.Clip
3.l.ovverh0using
4.Cable
5.Heaterdoor
6.Clip
Place container on floor to catch coolant.
Flemove two nuts (6) holding water valve (5) to heater core
(3) and separate valve from core.
Remove two nuts (2) holding pipe (1) to heater core and separate pipe trom core.
Slide heater core out of upper housing (4) and remove from
vehicle.
Install in reverse order. Use new gaskets.
4. Upper housing
1. Water pipe 2. Nut 3. Heater core
5. Water valve 6. Nuts
WATER VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable. Drain cooling system.
Remove screw and clamp holding control cable to valve (1).
Disconnect cable end from valve.
With container on floor to catch coolant, loosen clamp (2)
and disconnect hose (3) from valve.
Remove two nuts (4) holding valve to heater core and remove
valve.
Install in reverse order. Use new gasket.
1. Water valve
2. Clamp
3. Hose
4. Nut
Page 50-4
‘l. Diffuser
2. Duct
3. Gasket
4. Duct
5. Cables
6. Control panel
7. Fascia panel
8. Knobs
9. Cable
10. Clip
1 'l . Upper housing
12. Fan shroud
13. Vent assembly
14. Gasket
15. Due!
16. Lower housing
17. Heater door
18. Hinge
19. Clip
20. Pad
21. Blower motor
EXPLODED VIEW OF HEATER ASSEMBLY
22. Fan
23. Nut
24. Heater core
25. Gasket
26. Water valve
27. Pipe
28. Gasket
29. Pad
30. Gasket
31. Air intake door
501.03
Air Conditioning
Page 50-5
SERVICING
Insufficient air conditioning may be caused by problems other than A/C components.
Before removing any components, check for the following:
Leaves or other debris blocking radiator or condenser.
Leaves or other debris blocking fresh air inlet.
Blown fuse or faulty electrical system components.
Low freon charge.
Kinked or disconnected vacuum lines.
Observe following precautions before any service operations that require opening up freon system.
WARNING: Wear protective eye equipment while purging system. Do not discharge freon near open flame, a toxic gas may result.
CAUTION: Purge system slowly to prevent excessive loss of system oil.
NOTE: Whenever system is purged, it must be evacuated and recharged.
Purging System
With both valves closed on A/C manifold gauge set, attach red
hose (high pressure) to discharge fitting (2) and blue hose
[low pressure) to suction fitting (1).
1. Suction fitting
2. Discharge fitting
Place yellow hose in a clean rag.
Slowly open low and high pressure valves on gauge set. Allow
freon to bleed off through yellow hose.
CAUTION: Open valves only enough to bleed off freon slowly.
Flapid bleeding will draw excessive oil from system.
Check rag for signs of oil, a small amount is to be expected.
Replace oil if loss is excessive.
When both gauges read zero. system is purged.
Close valves on gauge set, and leave lines connected for evacuating.
}
-
0TH GAUGES
READ ZERO
Page 50—6
Evacuating System
CAUTION: System must not be operating and must be purged
before starting evacuation.
LOW PR ESSUR E GA UG E
Connect yellow hose from A/C gauge set to vacuum pump.
Start vacuum pump.
Open low pressure valve. Check that low pressure gauge indicates a slight vacuum. After a few minutes check that low
pressure gauge reads about 24" Hg, and high pressure gauge
reads slightly below zero. If high pressure gauge does not
read below zero. check system for blockage.
\‘ ABOUT 29" H91
After about 10 minutes of operation. low pressure gauge
should read about 29" Hg.
If gauge rises check system for leakage. Any leak must be
repaired.
Operate vacuum pump for a minimum of 30 minutes at about
29" Hg (maximum vacuum will be 1" less for each 1000 ft.
above sea level).
LOW PR ESSUR E VALVE
OPEN
Close low pressure valve. Check low pressure reading. it should
not rise faster than 1“ in five minutes. If reading rises faster.
check system for leak.
Shut off vacuum pump. Disconnect yellow hose from pump.
System is now ready to be charged with freon.
PRESSURE RISE
1" IN 5 MINUTES MAX.
LOW PRESSURE VALVE
CLOSED
Charging System Using Freon Pound Cans
NOTE: A/C gauge set is connected same as in preceding
instructions.
WARNING: Wear protective eye equipment. 00 not discharge
freon near open flame. a toxic gas may result.
Avoid heating freon container.
System charge is about 2 lbs.
Place adapter on freon can. Attach yellow hose to adapter.
Make sure both valves on A/C gauge set are closed.
BOTH VALVES
CLOSED
Pierce freon can and allow freon to enter yellow hose. Loosen
yellow hose connector at gauge set and allow gas to escape
for a few seconds to purge air in line. Retighten connector.
REFRIGERANT
CAN
Air Conditioning
501.03
Page 50-7
Make sure both valves on gauge set are closed.
Start engine.
Push "MAX A/C" button and set fan Speed at "Hi"
Set engine at fast idle (1500 to 2000 rpm).
With freon can upright. gradually open low pressure valve
to allow freon into system.
LOW
PRESSURE
VALVE
HIGH
PRESSURE
VALVE
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTlON: Do not open high pressure valve.
If pressure on low pressure gauge drops below 40 psi, freon can
may be inverted momentarily for faster charging. Do not hold
can inverted for more than a few seconds since excessive
amounts of liquid will be drawn into compressor and damage
it.
To determine when can is empty tap it on bottom. A hollow
ring should be heard when empty.
REFRIGERANT
CAN
Repeat above with additional cans to charge system with a
total of about 2 lbs.
Whether just adding freon to a low system, or fully charging,
check sight glass (1) on receiver/dryer (2) to determine when
system is completely charged. When freon passing through
sight glass is clear and free of bubbles, system is completely
charged.
Close low pressure valve.
Disconnect yellow hose from can.
As quickly and carefully as possible, disconnect red and blue
hoses from system connectors. Replace caps on connectors.
1. Sight glass
2. Receiver/dryer
Charging System Using Test Stand
Refer to test stand manufacturer's instructions.
Connect high pressure hose from test stand to discharge fitting
(2).
Connect low pressure hose from test stand to suction fitting
(1!.
Set charge indicator to about 2 lbs.
1. Suction fitting
2. Discharge fitting
Page 50-8
OPERATIONAL CHECKS
BOTH GAUGES
70 TO 85 PSI
Connecting Test Equipment
Close both valves on A/ C gauge set.
Remove caps from discharge and suction fittings (refer to preceding iigurel. Connect blue hose (low pressure) to suction fit-
ting and red hose (high pressure) to discharge fitting.
Check that both gages read 70 to 85 psi at 68° to 78°F.
NOTE: Pressure reading will vary according to ambienttemperatures, relative humidity. and atmOSpheric pressure.
Provide a fan to flow air over front of vehicle during following
checks.
BOTH VALVES
CLOSED
Normal System Operation
Set A/C controls to "MAX A/C" with fan switch on "Hi“
Accelerate engine and allow it to decrease to idle. On vehicles
with carburetor, check that idle is between 950 and 1050 rpm.
On vehicles with fuel injection,_check that idle speed does
not decrease with A/C on.
Accelerate engine to 1500 rpm. Check that low pressure
gauge reads between 7 and 42 psi and high pressure gauge
reads between 142 and 248 psi.
Check that freon passing through sight glass is clear and free
of bubbles.
1. Idle speed step-up control
2. Carburetor
Compressor Clutch and Minimum Pressure
Switch Check
-
35-45 PSI
Shut off engine. Turn ignition switch on.
Push “STOP" button and check that compressor clutch dis—
engages.
'
Push ”MAX AC" button and check that clutch engages.
Open low pressure valve on gauge set and slowly bleed freon
until clutch disengages. Clutch should disengage at 40 j: 5 psi
on low pressure gauge.
Close low pressure valve.
Recharge system. Evacuating system is" not required since
.
‘
system was not completely discharged. -
L'ow
Air Conditioning
501.03
Page 50-9
Condenser Fan Switch. Check
NOTE: Do not“ use fan in front of vehicle unless ambient
temperature is over 80°F.
Start engine and set A/C controls for maximum cooling. Run
engine at about 2000 rpm.
Check that condenser fan comes on between 240 to 280 psi
on high pressure gauge. This indicates that switch closed.
Allow engine speed to slow down. Check that fan goes off
between 160 and 140 psi. This indicates that switch opened.
High Pressure Switch Check
Connect test light to wire on frost prevent valve. Do not disconnect wire from valve.
Disconnect connector for condenser fan.
Increase engine speed to increase pressure Check that test
light comes on between 340 and 360 psi. This indicates that
high pressure switch closed.
Check that pressure starts to drop. This indicates that frost
prevent valve works.
'
Reconnect condenser fan connector. Check that test light goes
out between 210 and 195 psi. This indicates that high pressure
switch opened.
GROUND
Frost Prevent Switch Check
Leave test light connected to frost prevent valve wire.
Run engine at fast idle.
Place jumper wire into frost prevent switch connector.
Check that test light comes on and pressure starts to drop.
This indicates that system wiring is good.
Shut engine oft. Remove jumper and test light.
GROUND
FROST PR EVENT
SWITCH
VALVE
JUMPER
Page 50-10
Remove frost prevent switch.
OHMMETER
Provide ice cold water about 32°F.
Connect ohmmeter to terminals on switch‘ Place switch in
water. Check that switch closes.
Remove switch from water‘ Check that switch opens as it
warms up.
Install switch making sure surface of switch and pipe are clean.
FROST PREVENT
SWITCH
501.03
Page 50-11/12
A/C-HEATER VACUUM SYSTEM
Component Test
To test each vacuum component, apply vacuum to vacuum motor and check operation. If vacuum motor does
not operate, check for binding linkage or broken vacuum motor.
System Test
To test the vacuum system (engine running), press each push button on A/C-Heater Control, then check each
component for the condition indicated. Test for vacuum at each component by removing vacuum hose from
component, then manually blocking the hose.
A/C-HEATER CONTROL PUSH BUTTONS
COMPONENT
STOP
'X'fg
COMPRESSOR
Off
On
BLOWER (30)
Off
On
. Closed-NV
Closed-NV
‘ Open-NV
Closed—V
Closed
FRESH AIR DOOR (13)
RECIRCULATED AIR DOOR (11)
DEFROSTER DOOR (4)
WATER VALVE (33)
(Controlled by HEAT lever)
A/C
HEAT
DEF
On
Off
Off
On
Off/On*
Off/On*
Open-V
Open—V
Open-V
Open-NV
Closed-V
Closed—V
Closed-V
Closed-V
Closed-V
Closed»V
Open-NV
Closed
Closed/Open*
Open
Open
* — Optional
V - Vacuum to vacuum motor
NV - No vacuum to vacuum motor
FAN
O
L0
STOP
Af‘é‘
M
A/C
HEAT
DEF
ME
”'
HEAT
ON-OFF C
1 . Duct
2. Duct tube
3. Vacuum motor for defroster door
4. Defroster door
5. Diffuser
6. Duct
7. Gasket
8. Duct tube
15‘. Expansion valve
22. Plate
29. Clip
9. Duct
10. Defroster duct
16. Upper housing
23. Duct
24. Gasket
11 . Recirculated air door
18. Center housing
25. Lower housing
12. Door linkage
13. Fresh air door
14. Evaporator
19. Heater Core
20. Pipe
26. Vent assembly
30. Blower motor
31. Bracket
32. Bracket
33. Water valve
27. Bracket
34, Clip
21. Gasket
28. Fan
35. Vacuum mOtor I
for doors 1 1 and 1E
17. Gasket
EXPLODED VIEW C 1F A/C-HEATER ASSEMBLY
_
Air Conditioning
CONTROL PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Remove radio.
Remove two knobs (1 and 4) from leversc
Remove fascia panel {2).
Remove and disconnect clock. or remove clock opening cover
plate [3).
l. Knob 2. Fascia panel
3, Clock Opening cover plate 4. Knob
Remove screw (1) holding control panel (2) to support (3).
1. Screw
2. Control panel
3. Support
Remove four screws (1 and 3) holding support; (2) to instru—
ment panel.
Maneuver support out of instrument panel. leaving control
panel in position.
1. Screws
2. Support
3. Screws
501.03
Page 50-14
At top side of control panel, disconnect electrical connectors
l1 and 3} and vacuum hose connector (2).
At bottom side of control panel. remove screw and clamp
holding cable and disconnect cable from lever.
Remove control panel.
Install in reverse order.
1. Electrical connectors
2. Vacuum hose connector
3. Electrical connectors
1. Wires
7. Gasket
13. Lever
2. Socket
8. Switch panel
14. Pin
15. Clip
3.Bulb
9_Knob
4. Cover
10. Screw
16. Pad
5. Fascia panel
1 1 . Switch
17. Support
6. Push buttons
12. Knob
EXPLODED VIEW OF CONTROL PANEL
'*
Air Conditioning
HEATER CORE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable. Drain cooling system.
Unscrew gearshift knob (1).
Remove five screws (2 and 4) holding lower console (3).
Tilt and of console up until it clears gearshift lever and lay it
to one side.
1. Gearshift knob
2. Screws
3. Lower console
4. Screw
Remove three screws (1] and two retaining plates (2) holding
center vent duct (3) to housing.
Remove center vent duct.
1. Screws
2. Retaining plate
3. Center vent duct
Working in passenger's side footwell, remove access panel
covering expansion valve.
Lower fuse/relay panel and set to one side.
Working in both footwells. remove four clips (1) holding lower
housing (2) to center housing (3). Lower assembly down to
floor.
1. Clips
2. Lower housing
3. Center housing
501.03
Page 50-15
Page 50-16
Place container on floor to catch coolant.
Loosen two hose clamps (2) and disconnect hoses from heater
core (1].
Remove heater core from lower housing (3).
Install in reverse order.
1. Heater core
2. Hose clamps
3. Lower housing
A/C-H EATER UNIT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: AXC—heater unit must be removed to remove evaporator, blower assembly and water valve.
Disconnect battery ground cable. Drain cooling system.
Purge A/C system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Unscrew gearshift knob (1}.
Remove five screws {2 and 4) holding lower console (3).
Tilt end of console up until it clears gearshift lever and disconnect all electrical connectors.
Remove Iower consoie.
1. Gearshift knob
2. Screws
3. Lower console
4. Screw
Remove three screws (1) and two retaining plates (2) holding
center vent duct (3} to housing.
Remove center vent duct.
1. Screws
2. Retaining plate
3. Center vent duct
Air Conditioning
Working in passenger's side footwell, remove access panel
covering expansion valve.
Lower fuse/relay panel and set to one side.
With container on floor to catch coolant, loosen clamp (1) and
disconnect heater core outlet hose (2).
Loosen fittings (4) and disconnect high and low pressure lines
(5}.
Loosen clamp (6) and disconnect drain hose (7).
Disconnect blower motor electrical connector.
Disconnect electrical leads (3) from frost prevent switch.
1. Clamp
2. Outlet hose
5. Pressure lines
3. Electrical leads
6. Clamp
4_ Fitting
7. Drain hose
Working at lirewall side of unit, remove screw (3) and clamp
holding water valve cable (1 ) to bracket.
Loosen screw (4) holding end of cable to valve and disconnect
cable end.
Loosen clamp (2) and disconnect inlet hose (5).
1.Watervaivecable
2.Clamp
3.5crew
4_Screw
5.Inlethose
Working in driver's side footwell, disconnect vacuum hose (1)
from vacuum motor (2).
From each side of unit. remove two nuts(3) holding unit to body
at top.
Fold carpet and padding away from tunnel.
Maneuver A/C-heater unit out through passenger's side
footwell.
l.Vacuum hose
2. Vacuum motor
3.Nuts
501.03
Page 50-18
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
‘J
Loosen clamp holding hose (3) to heater core and disconnect
hose.
Remove two screws (1) holding water valve to bracket (2) and
remove valve.
Remove clip 15) holding temperature sensing tube and frost
prevent switch {4} to pipe.
Loosen fitting (7) and remove expansion valve (6).
1.5crews 2. Bracket 3.Hose
5. Expansion valve 7. Fitting
4_Frostpreventswitch
5. Clip
Remove clip (5) holding vacuum motor rod (5) to door linkage
and disconnect rod from linkage.
Remove four clips (1) holding upper housing (2) to center
housinn).
Lift upper housing off of center housing.
1.Clips
2.Upperhousing
5.l 6.Ciip
3.Centerhousing
4.Vacuummmor
Remove four screws (1 and 4) retaining evaporator (2) in upper
housingt3).
Remove evaporator from housing.
1.5crew
2.Evaporator
3. Upper housing
4. Screw
.
\IB 33.1mm '5 .4ni9
,x‘
H.
Air Conditioning
501.03
Page 50-19
Remove connector casing (1) from blower motor wires (2).
noting position of wires for reassembly.
Remove four clips (3) holding center housing (5) to lower housing (4).
Lift center housing off of lower housing.
l.Connectorcasing
2.Wires
3.Clips
4.Lowerhousing
5. Center housing
Lift heater core (1 ) out of lOWer housing (4).
Remove screw (3) holding blower assembly (2) in housing and
remove blower assembly.
Reassemble in reverse order of disassemblv. Use new "0"
ring on expansion valve.
l.Heatercore
2.Blower assembly
3. Screw
4. Lower housing
CONDENSER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Condenser and radiator are removed as an assembly.
Remove twelve screws (2) holding grille (1) to body and remove
grille.
Remove four bolts (3 and 5) and washers holding center section
of spoiler (4) to body and remove spoiler.
1.Gri|le
2.5crews
3.Bolts
4.Spoiler
5.Bolts
Page 50-20
Drain cooling system.
Purge air conditioning system. Refer to procedures in this
section.
Disconnect fittings (1) connecting lines (10) to condenser pipes.
Loosen clamps [4 and 6) and disconnect hoses (3 and 7) from
pipes.
Disconnect electrical connectors (5) to electric fans.
Remove two nuts (2] holding support bracket (9) to body and
lower bracket complete with radiator (8) and condenser.
Remove four nuts holding condenser to radiator and separate
condenser from radiator.
Install in reverse order.
1.Fittings
7. Hose
2.Nut
3.Hose
8.Fladiatcr
5.Connector
4.C|amp
9.5upport bracket
6.Clamp
10.A/Clines
CONDENSER FAN
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Working from under vehicle, disconnect electrical connector“ ).
Remove four nuts (2 and 4) and washers holding condenser
fan assembly [3) to radiator and remove fan assembly.
Install in reverse order.
1,Electricalconnector
2.Nut
3.Fanassembty
4,Nut
RECEIVER/DRYER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove protection panel from right-hand side of front luggage
compartment.
Purge system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Disconnect fittings [1 and 4) for condenser and expansion
valvelines.
Remove two bolts (2) holding receiver/dryer (3) to body and
remove receiver/ dryer.
Replace receiver/dryer if clogged or moisture saturated.
Install in reverse order.
1.Fitting
2,Bolt
3. Receiver/dryer
4. Fitting
Air Conditioning
THERMAL SWITCHES
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: There are three thermal switches: condenser fan
control switch (2), high pressure control switch (3)
and frost prevent switch. The condenser fan and
high pressure switches are on the high pressure line
next to the receiver/dryer. The frost prevent switch
is on the suction line at the evaporator, as shown in
the following illustration.
Remove protective panel from right-hand side of front luggage
compartment.
Disconnect electrical connectors for switches. Unwrap insula—
tion.
Unclip and remove retaining strap clips (4). Remove switches.
For installation. make sure pipe and switch faces are clean
of dirt or corrosion. Place switches on pipe and secure with
clips. Wrap switches and pipe with insulation. Connect wires.
1 . Receiver/dryer 2. Condenser tan control switch
3. High pressure control switch 4. Clips
EXPANSION VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Working in passenger's side footwell. rem0ve access panel
covering expansion valve. Lower fuse/ relay panel and set to
one side.
Purge system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Remove temperature sensing tube from clamp (4) on evaporator outlet line (3).
Disconnect high pressure line (2) from expansion valve (1).
Loosen fitting (5) holding expansion valve to evaporator inlet
line and remove valve.
Install in reverse order. Use new "0" ring.
1. Expansion valve 2. High pressure line 3. Evaporator outlet line
4. Clamp 5. Fitting 6. Frost prevent switch
FROST PR EVENT VALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Purge system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Remove electrical lead (2) from frost prevent valve (3).
Disconnect two fittingsH ) from ends of valve.
Remove two nuts (5) holding bracket (4) to body and remove
valve complete with bracket.
Install in reverse order.
l.Fitting
2.Electrical lead
3. Frostpreventvalve
4. Bracket
5.Nut
501.03
Page 5021
Page 50-22
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
On vehicles with fuel injection. remove air cleaner. Refer to
102.04. Purge system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Disconnect low pressure switch electrical connector (3).
Unscrew low pressure switch (1 I from union (2).
Install in reverse order.
1.Lowpressure switch ‘2. Union
3. Electrical connector
FAST IDLE ELECTROVALVE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(Vehicles With Carburetor)
Disconnect electrical connectors and vacuum hoses (1 and 3)
from electrovalve (4).
Remove two nuts holding electrovalve to bracket (2) and remove
electrovalve.
Install in reverse order.
‘l.Vacuurn hose
2. Bracket
3.Vacuum hose
4. Fast idle electrovalve
=I EMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Vehicles With Fuel Injection)
Disconnect electrical connectorsll ) and vacuum hoses (3 and 5)
.rom electrovalve(2).
Remove two bolts holding electrovalve to bracket (4) and remove
slectrovalve.
nstall in reverse order.
LEIectrical connectors 2. Fast idleelectrovalve
L Bracket 5. Vacuum hose
3.Vacuum hose
Air Conditioning
VACUUM RESERVOIR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
From behind passenger's seat. remove spare tire cover and
spare tire.
Disconnect two vacuum hoses l‘l ) from reservoir (3).
Remove nut [2! holding resevoir to bracket and remove reser—
voir.
Install in reverse order.
1.Vacuum hoses
2.Nut
3.Vacuum reservoir
COMPRESSOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove access panel from inside rear luggage compartment.
Purge system. Refer to procedures in this section.
Disconnect compressor clutch wire (1) at connector.
Disconnect inlet and outlet lines (2) from compressor.
Remove nut, through bolt (3) and washers holding bracket (4).
1.Wire
2. Compressor lines
3. Bolt
4. Bracket
Raise and support rear of vehicle.
Remove three bolts holding shield under compressor and
remove shield.
Remove nut, through bolt (2) and washers holding bracket.
[1).
Lower Compressor out of vehicle with bracket attached.
Install in reverse order. To adjust belt. refer to 101.15.
1. Bracket
2. Bolt
501.03
Page 50-23
Page 50-24
COMPRESSOR CLUTCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove compressor as outlined above.
Using Sankyo wrench 32409 and 3/4" wrench remove not (3).
Using Sankyo puller. remove clutch plate (4).
Remove external and internal snap rings with snap ring pliers.
Using Sankyo puller 32418 remove pully assembly (6).
Remove three screws (5) to remove clutch coil (1) from compressor.
Installation is reverse of removal.
1. Clutch coil 2. Compressor
6. Polly assembly)r
3. 3/4" out
4. Clutch plate
5. Screw
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
55
BODY
70
ELECTRICAL - 55
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL 8:
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
Page
55
551.01
552.01
553.01
554.01
555.01
55510
555.15
Specifications .......................................
Electronic Ignition ....................................
Starting System .....................................
Charging System ....................................
Lighting Equipment ..................................
Signaling ............................................
Instrument Cluster ...................................
Accessories ..........................................
55-1
55-7
55-13
55-17
55-23
55-27
55-29
55-31
55
Electrical
Page 55-1
SPECIFICATIONS
IGNITION
Firing order .......................................
Distributor
Type ..............................................
Static advance:
— Vehicles with carburetor ......................
1 -3 -4 - 2
Bosch — 0-237 . . .
5°
-— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
Centrifugal advance:
— Vehicles with carburetor ..... _.................
-—— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
Total advance (static and centrifugal):
— Vehicles with carburetor ......................
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
28° to 32° at 5500 rpm
26° to 30° at 3500 rpm
Vacuum advance:
— Vehicles with carburetor
with air pump .............................
without air pump ..........................
— Vehicles with fuel injection ...................
16° to 18° at 12 in. Hg
26" to 30" at 12 in. Hg
12° to 16° at 11 in. Hg
Air gap ...........................................
Rotor arm resistance .............................
Pickup coil resistance .............................
Electronic Control Module
Type ..............................................
Current limiter output ............................
Input voltage .....................................
Coil
Type ..............................................
Primary winding resistance at 68°F (20°C) ........
Secondary winding resistance at 68°F (20°C) .....
Ballast resistor resistance ........................
10°
23° to 27°.at 5500 rpm
16° to 20° at 3500 rpm
0.011 to 0.019 in. (0.3 to 0.5 mm}
6000 ohms
890 to 1285 ohms
Bosch — 0-277-100-029
4.5 to 6 amps
6 to 18 volts
Bosch — 0-221-122-012
1.1 to 1.7 ohms
6,000 to 10,000 ohms
0.85 to 0.95 ohms
Spark Plugs
Thread diameter and pitch, metric ................
Vehicles With Carburetor
Type ...................... AC
............................ Bosch
............................ Champion
............................ Marelli
Gap ...........................................
Vehicles With Fuel Injection
Type ..........................................
Gap ...........................................
NormaI
42XLS
W175T30
N9Y
CW7LP
M 14 x 1.25
Resistor
R42XLS
W175TR3O
RNSY
CW7LPR
0.023 to 0.027 in.
0.027 to 0.031 in.
(0.6 to 0.7 mm)~
(0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Champion RNSY
0.027 to 0.031 in. (0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Page 55-2
STARTER MOTORS
Type and male .........
Boschy—
Marelli
0001212210
E 9509/12
Voltage ..........—..—. . .
12 V
12 V
Rated output ..........
0.8 kW
0.9 kW
Direction of rotation,
—
pinion end ............
clockwise
clockwise
Poles .................
4
4
Field winding ..........
series
Pinion engagement . . . . .—.
with flywheel
Control ...............
—
with flywneel
“h solenoid
solenoid
Internal diameter of
expanded shoes ........
60.85 to 61.02 mm
Internal diameter of
armature ..............
Mechanical Data
Brush spring pressure
{new brushes) ........
Armature end float . . . .
Depth for commutator
recutting ...........
series
59.95 to 60.00 mm
1.15 to 1.30 kg
1.15 to 1.35 kg
0.10 to 0.15 mm
0.15 to 0.45 mm
0.8 mm
0.5 to 0.7 mm
Data for Bench Testing
Running test (‘1:
— Current ...........
— Speed ............
— Voltage ...........
200 A
1900 i 100 rpm
10 V
— Torque developed . . .
0.55 kgm
Lock test 1‘):
— Current ...........
320 to 410 A
440 to 460 A
— Torque developed . . .
1.25 kgm
2 1.4 kgm
test P):
— Current ...........
—Voltage ...........
— Speed ............
35 to 55 A
11.5V
6000 to 8000 rpm
— Voltage ...........
Light running torque
8.5 V
7.5 i 0.1 V
35 i 5 A
11.4to11.7V
6000 t 500 rpm
Solenoid
.Winding resistance at
20°C:
Pull-in ...........
Hold-in ..........
Travel of contact
plate .............
Magnetic plunger
travel .............
Lubrication
Pinion splines ........
Contact surface of
plnlon sleeve .......
('1 A: 20" c
0.37 t 0.01 52
1.25 i 0.05 52
3.25 to 3.95 mm
12.58 to 15.48 mm
Olifiat VS+ Artic (SAE 10 W)
Grassofiat MR 3
Electrical
55
Page 55-3
CHARGING SYSTEM
Alternator
Make and Type .................................
Bosch
K1 -14 V65 A 21
Marelli
A 125-14 V-55 A
Voltage ........................................
12 V
12 V
Maximum output (constant) ....................
65 A
55 A
Cut-in speed, balanced thermally ...............
1100 t 50 rpm
900 i 50 rpm
Current flow at 7000 rpm and
balanced thermally .........................
2 65 A
.>_ 55 A
3.36 i 0.3 $2
3.1 t 0.1 Q
Direction of rotation (drive side) .................
Clockwise
Clockwise
Engine/alternator driving ratio .................
1 to 1.75
1 to 1.75
Field winding resistance across
slip rings (1) .................................
Rectifier diodes .................................
Voltage Regulator
Make and Type .................................
Built-in diode plate (all)
Bosch
Electronic, integral
FIMM ”RTI' 1 13 C"
Electronic, integral
Alternator speed for adjustments ...............
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
Current for thermal balance ....................
20 to 22 A
20 to 22 A
Regulating voltage (1) ...........................
13.8 to 14.2 V
13.8 to 14.2 V
with alternator [2)
with alternator
Battery
Voltage ........................................
12 V
Capacity (at 20-hour discharge rate) ............
60 AH
(11 At 25°C.
{2} Some vehicles are equipped with a non-integral regulator.
Page 55-4
LIGHTING
Location
SAE
Standard
FIAT
Std. Part No.
Headlights(high and low beams) .....................
"Sealed Beam”
headlight unit 6012
Front lamps:
— Turn signal and parking ...........................
1034 (3/32 cp)
1/141446/90
(12 V - 5/21 W)
Rear lamps:
— Turn signal, back-up and stop .....................
1073 (32 cp)
— Tail ...............................................
1073 (32 cp)
— License plate .....................................
67 (4 cp)
Side marker lamps ....................................
158 (2 cp)
1/41458/90
Courtesy light ........................................
—
1 /08630/90
(12 V - 5 W)
—
1(1/‘211f393/38
Fiber Optic cable lamp .................................
Instrument cluster lights ..............................
".EX GAS SENSOR” indicator ........................
Turn signal indicator ..................................
High beams indicator .................................
Battery charge indicator ..............................
Low oil pressure indicator ............................
Fuel reserve indicator .................................
Parking and tail lamps indicator .......................
Hazard warning signal indicator ......................
Low brake fluid level/hand brake ON indicator ........
Fasten belts indicator. ................................
’ Rear window defogger ...............................
Heater control panel light .............................
Cigarette lighter light .................................
Ideogram illumination light ...........................
Air conditioner ideogram light ........................
—
1/41460/90
(12 V - 21 W)
1/41460/90
(12 V - 21 W)
1/41459/90
(12 V - 5 W)
1/41437/90
(12 V - 1.2 W)
Electri ial
$5—
Page 55-5/5
FU ES AND RELAYS
FUSES
Eight 8-Amp, six 16-Amp and two 3-Amp fuses are located in fuse/relay panel under glove compartment. In addition, one 8—Amp
and two 16-Amp fuses are located in separate in—line holders.
Panel Fuses
Stop lights
Stop light switch
A/C blower relay coil
Rightfront marker light
(8 Amps)
A/C control relay coil
Heater fan motor
Heater fan switch
Rear window defogger switch
Right front park light
Left taillight
Right license light
Left rear marker light
Lights-on indicator
Digital clock
Instrument cluster lights
Dash panel lights
Turn lights
Turn indicator
Hazard indicator
\
A
(8 Amps)
WlPER DELA‘
\_ TIMER
\/
l
(16 Amps)
Right headlight motor
L
Left headlight motor
Rear window defogger relay coil
(16 Amps)
(8' Amps)
Windshield wiper/washer switch
'Windshield washer pump
Wiper motor
Back-up switch
Back-up light
Gulp valve thermoswitch
Gulp valve electrovalve solenoid
Seatbelt timer
Seatbelt relay coil
Fasten seatbelt indicator
Brake indicator
Digital clock (display on)
Oil pressure warning indicator
Exhaust gas sensor indicator
C
(8 Amps)
D
M
(16 Amps)
N
(16 Amps)
Rear window defogger
Turn/ haza rd flasher
Coolant fan
Horns
O
Condenser fan motor
P
A/C blower motor
(16 Amps)
(16 Amps)
Left headlight high beam
High beam indicator
Q
(3 Amps)
Right headlight high beam
(3 Amps)
R
Headlight closing relay coils
Headlight opening relay coils
(8 Amps)
E
(8 Amps)
F
(8 Amps)
G
(8 Amps)
Left headlight low beam
ln-Line Fuses
8 Amps
Right tail right 9
Left license light
Right rear marker light
Lights-on indicator
FUSE/RELAY PANEL
Cigar lighter
Power antenna motor
l
l
Digital clock (power)
l
Courtesy light
.
l
Seatbelt chime
Right headlight low beam
Left front marker light
Left front ark li ht
Fuel injectors fan motor
Carburetor fan motor
16 Amps
Power wmdow motors
16 Amps
Auxiliary air regulator
Fuel pump
UF'PROTECTED—CfRCUfiS
Alternator, starter, ignition, charge indicator, radiator fan relay winding, radio, parking light switch and headlight control relay windings, instrument cluster lights, fuel injection relay winding, power window relay winding.
551.01
Electronic Ignition
Page 55-7
DESCRIPTION
With ignition switch closed, battery voltage is supplied to electronic control module and through a ballast resistor to primary side of
ignition coil. The resistor is used as a current limiter. Voltage is regulated by the control module to supply a regulated current to primary side of ignition coil. When the distributor turns, a trigger generates an impulse on the pickup assembly. This impulse is sensed
by the control module. and turns the coil primary on and off. Each time the coil primary is turned off, a high voltage is induced in the
coil secondary. The high voltage is distributed through the distributor rotor cap, to spark plugs.
R ESISTOR
IGNITION
SWITCH
Er.
*‘
BATTERY
,
SPARK
PLUG
+
15
1
O
:
I
I
0
°
CONTROL MODULE 0
:
COIL
|
|
|
BREAKERLESS
DISTRIBUTOR
i____.______
..
TO FUEL INJECTION
CONTROL UNIT
SERVICE
Before performing any service observe the following:
00 NOT
0 Energize ignition unless coil support base is properly grounded.
0 Crank engine with high voltage wire disconnected from coil.
0 Disconnect high voltage wire from coil when engine is running.
- Start or crank engine when instrument panel is disconnected.
0 Ground primary circuit or use diagnostic equipment to ground primary circuit.
- Test for current or voltage by flashing terminals with each other or to ground.
I
Disconnect battery cables when engine is running. The electronic voltage regulator will be damaged.
DO
0 When required, the distributor pickup assembly may be disconnected when engine is running, or when cranking for compression
testing.
Page 55-8
PRIMARY lNPUT CHECK
iGNITION SWITCH
COIL
Connect voltmeter from coil +8 terminal to ground.
—"' ___ ..
'
HE
With ignition switch on, check for 12 volts (battery).
if not, check for faulty battery, ignition switch, wiring, or
connections.
15
“EN
0
GROUND CHECK
[
With ignition switch off, connect an Ohmmeter from control
module support mount to battery ground terminal.
9
O
O
o
m
0
0
IGNITION
SWITCH
+
7
31d
15
31
18
16
0
'3 CONTROL
MODULE
Reconnect one Ohmmeter lead to coil high voltage terminal.
Check for 6K to 10K ohms.
Replace coil if not within specifications.
Disconnect one end of resistor, then connect Ohmmeter across
resistor.
Check for 0.85 to 0.95 ohms.
Replace resistor if not within specifications.
.
'-‘
"‘1—
L
Also check that control module casing is clean, and that
mounting hardware is clean and tight.
Check for 1.1 to 1.? ohms.
__L
BATTERY
If not, check support, mounting, and battery ground connections.
Disconnect primary leads from coil, then connect Ohmmeter
to coil.
O
E
Check for less than 0.2 ohms.
COIL RESISTANCE CHECK
BATTERY
*oooo -)
1.1 T0 1.7 OHMS
Ge
V
0.29 OR LESS
6000 TO 10,000 OHMS
0.85 m 0.95 oums
551.01
Electronic Ignition
Page 55-9
PICKUP ASSEMBLY CHECK
lNFlNITY {'I
Disconnect pickup assembly from control module.
390 TO
‘285 OHMS
Connect ohmmeter to pickup assembly connector (terminals
7 and 31d).
Check for 890 to 1285 ohms.
Reconnect one ohmmeter lead to distributor body. Check for
infinity ohms.
:
comTHbLMODULE
CONNECTOR
.LL 1: ".1_ 1L_"..
. r .m.
Replace pickup assembly if not within specifications.
l
Using a nonmagnetic feeler gauge check gap between stator
pole and trigger. Adjust as required.
.smron POLE O
“‘1
o
o:
.TRIGGER
O
I
0.3 T0 0.5 mm
/ (001110 0.019 ml
GAP
1.
___
_
a
\GAP
CONTROL MODULE CHECK
Reconnect primary leads to coil, pickup assembly to control
module, and resistor lead.
5mm
-—l
_
Disconnect high voltage wire from distributor. Do not disconnect from coil.
E
I I
‘GNITION SWITCH
SPARK
o
While holding (use insulated holder) high voltage wire about
5 mm from ground, crank engine and check for spark.
BATTERY
Replace control module if no spark appears.
7
ROTATE
DISTRIBUTOR
SHAFT
ELIE
0
O
O
‘3
°
Check all parts for cracks. wear. or breaks that may affect
system operation.
Check cap for corroded terminals.
—SHIELD
TRlGGER
mowur .
ASSEMBLY
VACUUM
CAPSULE
---r
$REL . -_
I
15
O
SYSTEM PARTS CHECK
Clean or replace cap as required.
31
CHECKING AND SETTING IGNITION TIMING
Check ignition timing with a timing light.
Connect timing light power leads to battery or to hot side of
coil. Either connection will not affect ignition system.
When using an inductive timing light. connect inductive pickup to number 1 spark plug wire at a point where it can be
separated from other spark plug wires.
High voltage wire must not be disconnected from coil while
engine is running or being cranked.
Crankshaft timing mark (4) on crankshaft pulley indexes with
timing pointer.
With rpm at less than 900. timing should be 5° BTDC for
vehicles with carburetor, 10" BTDC for vehicles with fuel
injection.
To adjust timing. loosen nut. then turn distributor as required
to obtain correct timing. Tighten nut.
1 TDC
2. 5" BTDC
3 10" BTDC
4. Crankshaft pulley mark
DISTRIBUTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Crank engine until crankshaft pulley timing mark indexes
with timing pointer.
Remove distributor cap from distributor and lay to one side.
Disconnect vacuum hose (2) from vacuum diaphragm (4).
Disconnect electrical connector for distributor electrical lead
{1 l at side of distributor l3).
CAUTION: Upon installation, make certain that raised notch
on electrical connector is correctly indexed with
slot in distributor.
Noting rotor position for installation, remove nut, washer
and plate. Remove distributor and gasket.
Install in reverse order. Set timing.
1. Electrical lead
2. Vacuum hose
4. Vacuum diaphragm
3. Distributor
Electronic Ignition
551.01
Page 55-11
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY
Unclip cap (21). Remove rotor (20) and cover (19). Remove screws (1 and 3) to remove vacuum diaphragm (2). Remove lock ring (18).
lockwasher (16), rotor (15) and lock ring (14). Remove screw (9) to remove connector (24). Remove screws (5. 7, and 23) to remove
coil (13) and pickup assembly (12). Remove screw (1 1) to separate pickup assembly. Remove clip (6 and 22) only if damaged.
Reassembiy is reverse of disassembly.
1,Screw
2. Vacuum diaphragm
3. Screw
4. Support
5. Screw
6. Spring clip
7. Screw
8. Gasket
9. Screw
10. Spring clip
1 1. Screw
12. Pickup assembly
13. Coil
14. Lock ring
15. Rotor
16. Lockwashers
17. Pin
18. Lock ring
19. Cover
20. Rotor
21 . Cap
22. Spring clip
23. Screw
24. Connector
25. Body
INSPECTION
Check distributor cap (21 ) for cracks. breaks, or corroded terminals. For light corrosion. clean terminals, otherwise replace.
Check rotor (20) for cracks. breaks. or c0rrosion. Replace if damaged.
Check rotor(15)for bent for broken tabs. Replace if damaged.
Check coil (1 3) for damaged wires. Check for 890 to 1285 ohms resistance. Replace if damaged.
Check pickup assembly (1 2) for damaged parts. Replace if damaged.
Check vacuum diaphragm (2) for leakage. Replace if damaged.
Check body (25) for worn or sticky shaft. Replace if da maged.
Page 55-12
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove two screws holding cover at right side of engine com—
partment.
Disconnect electrical connector (1) from control module (2).
Remove two nuts {3) holding control module to body and re—
move control module.
Install in reverse order.
1. Electrical connector
2, Electronic control module
3. Nut
Starting System
STARTER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery gr0und cable. Disconnect electrical leads
to starter (4).
Remove three bolts (3), lockwashers (2), and washers (1) to
remove starter.
1.Washer
2. Lockwesher
3. Bolt
4. Starter
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (MARELLl)
Remove nut (4), lockwasher (3), and two washers (2).
Disconnect terminal on housing assembly (5) from stud on
starter solenoid (1 1.
Remove nut (10). lockwasher (11), and washer (12) to remove
starter solenoid (1) and spring (14).
Remove stud (15) only if damaged.
Remove two nuts (7) and bolts (9). Carefully separate support (6) from housing assembly (5) until brushes can be removed from brush holder.
Separate housing assembly (5) from support (13). Remove
washer (8).
1. Starter solenoid 2. Washers 3. Lockwasher 4. Nut
5. Housing assembiy 6. Support 7. Nut 8. Washer 9. Bolt
10. Nut
11. Lockwasher
12. Washer
13. Support
14. Spring
1 5. Stud
Remove plug (13). Remove cotter pin (11) and pin (2).
Separate armature (4) with attached parts (5 through 9), fork
(3) and cup (1) from support (12). Remove washers (8 and 9).
Press on clutch (5) to remove clip (7).
Remove ring (6) and clutch (5) from armature (4).
Remove bushing (10) from support (12) only it damaged.
1. Cup
2. Pin
3. Fork
8. Washers 9. Washer
13. Plug
4. Armature
10. Bushing
5. Clutch
6. Ring
11. Cotter pin
7. Clip
12. Support
552.01
Page 55-13
Page 55-14
If damaged, remove bushing (7) by removing screw (9) and
cover [8).
1
Remove brush holder (4) only if damaged.
To remove coil assembly (2), remove four screws (11) and
stator cores ( 1). Carefully slide coil assembly (2) from housing
(10).
Assembly is reverse of disassembly.
if a new coil assembly is installed, preheat to about 120°F
(49°C). This will aid fitting in housing.
Lubricate inner spline at clutch with 10 W oil.
1. Stator core 2. Coil assembly 3. Spring 4. Brush holder
5. Insulator 6. Support 7. Bushing 8. Cover 9. Screw
10. Housing 11, Screw
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (BOSCH)
Remove nut (9) and washer (8).
Disconnect terminal on housing assembly (4) from stud on
starter solenoid (7).
Remove three screws (6) to remove starter solenoid (7).
Remove two screws (1) and washers (2). Carefully separate
cover (3) until brushes can be removed from brush holder.
Separate housing assembly (4) from support (5).
1. Screw 2. Washer 13. Cover 4. Housing
7. Starter solenoid 8. Washer 9. Nut
5. Support
6. Screw
Remove screw (14) and nut (16).
Separate fork (15) and armature (1) with attached parts (2
through 5) from support (11).
Squeeze bushing (2) and pinion (5) together to remove lock
ball (4).
Separate pinion (5), spring (3) and bushing (2) from armature
{1).
Remove cover (6), spring (7). cup (8), washer (9) and bushing
(10) only if damaged.
Remove plug (13) and cover (12).
1.Armature
7. Spring
13. Plug
2. Bushing
8. Cup
3. Spring 4. Lock ball 5. Pinion 6. Cover
9. Washer 10. Bushing 11. Support 12. Cover
14. Screw
15. Fork
16. Nut
10
552.01
Starting System
Page 5545/15
if damaged, remove bushing (5) by removing screw (1),cover
(2), ring (3} and washers (4).
Remove brush holder (8) only if damaged.
To remove coil assembly (9), remove four screws (11) and
stator cores (12). Carefully slide coil assembly (9) from hous-
ing (10).
Assemble in reverse order of disassembly.
If a new coil is installed, preheat to about 120°F (49°C). This
will aid fitting in housing.
Lubricate inner spline of pinion with 10 W oil.
1. Screw 2. Cover 3. Ring 4. Washers 5. Bushing 6. Cover
7. Spring 8. Brush holder 9. Coil assemn 10. Housing
11 . Serew 12. Stator core
H
g
12
é?-“
“g
2 1
W9
54 3
1
Charging System
553.01
Page 55-17
ALTERNATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
From inside rear luggage compartment. remove engine compartment access panel.
Remove three nuts to remove rear shield. On Bosch alternator.
remove cooling duct.
Mark to identify. then disconnect electrical leads.
Remove bolt and nut (2). Remove nut (3), lockwasher, washer
and bolt to remove alternator (1).
Install in reverse order. Adjust belt tension. Refer to 101.15.
1. Alternator
2. Nut
3. Nut
4. Integral voltage regulator
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (MARELLI)
Disconnect electrical plug and remove two screws to remove voltage regulator (15) (if equipped with integral voltage regulator).
Remove screw and washer to remove brush holder (13).
Remove nut. lockwasher, pulley (1), fan (2), spacer (3), key (6), and spacer (4).
Remove three long bolts, lockwashers, and washers, then carefully separate front frame (5) from rear frame (1 1).
Remove rotor assembly (7) from rear frame by pulling rotor out.
Remove nut, washer, nut. lockwasher, bolt and washer to remove cover (14).
Remove rectifier assembly (12) by first disconnecting three stator wires. Carefully separate Stator assembly (8) from rear frame.
Remove screw to remove condenser (10). Remove screw. washer. and insulator (16).
Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.
1. Pulley
5. Frame
2. Fan
6. Key
10. Condenser
9. Seal
13. Brush holder
14. Protective cover
3. Spacer
7. Rotor
11. Frame
15. Voltage regulator“
4. Spacer
B. Stator
12. Rectifier
16. Insulator
*Some vehicles with Marelli alternator are equipped with a
non—integral voltage regulator.
ALTERNATOR MAR ELLI A125-14V—55A
Page 55-18
DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY (BOSCH)
Disconnect electrical plug and remove screw and lockwasher to remove condenser (7).
Remove two screws to remove voltage regulator/brush assembly (8 and 9),
Remove nut to remove pulley (1). fan (2), spacers. and key(13).
Remove four short screws on front frame (3) to free bearing retainer (14).
Remove four long screws to separate from frame from rear frame (6).
Remove rotor assembly (12) from rear frame by pulling rotor out.
Remove stator assembly (4) and rectifier assembly (5) as a unit by removing three screws. Remove three stator wires from rectifier
to separate rectifier.
Reassemble in reverse order of disassembly.
1. Pulley
6. Frame
1 1. Bearing
2. Fan
7. Condenser
12. Rotor
3. Frame
4. Stator
5. Rectifier
8. Voltage regulator
13. Key
9. Brush assembly
14. Bearing retainer
10. Seal
15. Bearing
ALTERNATOR BOSCH K1-14V-65A—21
553.01
Page 55-19
Charging System
3.83.)
3.5.5.32
tam
_
EE
o:
2w
22...? .5352; _.m_w_._..mw_
.EmEQEUw «m9 €680:
.23... E95“...
"Emma. .05...
.33.. .wumE
.omc
mains:
£94235...
a uuuuuuuuu
.
.nz. _
magic
.55 _
mhmm
.35 :3... o. .330... 95 «59..»
no; .23.. md. cur: mam. mum». 532:0... =
5.36..
.2
5850.3
ESE
-9
£3: m. ca... .23.... £59. 335:9. =
.363.
BEEF.) 307. .fimmnm rm... co :8 .23:
.9... 9:2. Ewan 30... Sam 8mm .m 9.6.5 .3
Fan—E can h< EEG—gm.
aha?) min 3 m.N_.
81mm EmhwEJQ.’
ham... m 0.5.... O)
.
.
.
xUmIU
.
o
f
OZ_GEmwhh¢fl
an.» .30:
2 on “Em acacm n95. .50 mmom 5:86.... ._ u
.95.? E296 5.6.3 E :05
25.39“. .2 Jams“. .50 cm .9. v.30 5.3.9.. = o
.59 3.5 .936
.c. E...— xomcu .aEmcm cam .92.... 5.3.6.... 2 .
.3... $33) imam. can
:33. .mmcmEn 5322.". .5 acts;
5.3....»
.E 2.3». 5. 13...". .Em... .0... $3
Emu... :0.
5.3.3. 33...... .525". ._
5.2:... cc E... h o
PDQ
mmOG EOP(U_DZ_
g
.
.
.
“262m 55m
20 >3. zo_._._zu_
xomIU Emhm>w motoxm.
5.2.
>mwhhm
.
.
.
3.2.59. wage: $525.5: m 5.2.. ER.
.533 m5 53.52... :555. 5:5 3.2:? oEam.
.._o.mc.m~_m 32am.
.6 :39. 5:252:33
EOE... m. mango... : n
.9332". m. 66.3%.. $2.?
.5595 0.... «5.322003 5......) m. mango: = .
.32
32.9: Ema!
:2... .323
Baum... Sacco“. .
3:..s
093.9. noon :32: u :23. .
.BEEEE
E9...
55.3mm. mum—.2. uBEwm .mEmu Danna roams .uoccoomfi -
”5.5.33: 35.5?
noon 2:52.. .3452.
IONIC
mOhflzm m.._.._<...m.O.—.<.. 30m m.
¥Z<¢U mZaZw
a .DZiZdEU wzazw.
5.42.2.2 “.50.; a
whim». «3.5 5.50.?
353:3 .22....56 .owccouw:
.imzmn 5.3m.
.2 v.92... .23... m an...“ 32 name 565...”... =
.363.
.¢.wE._o> 202 «9.39. .v o. m. 9:95 3:50
Ems—B o. BEER... "Sacco
....ou En: mfiwu mums? Ln... Baccoumfi
on. .5533...
Stanza...“
.umccoufln.
.o...
mh
.923
Eu... Ba
.
.
5.2.69 mans? $525.29: u 5...... van.
Ev .5592... _..w._m.2 5.3 $.21? mEam.
63.3..
.mwéo. 3
:23». gas 309.0 .
02.5.2302
EOFdJDmum—m
mudhqnu).
mans—Um 02:230....
D24 26640 to“. xuwIUI
025.... .6552; .n v.95
“Em flaunts 6: Ba 5.29. 53.5 .ucm BE.
sum. 32.0: .6. «320m GEEJOE E... 3320
.99:
26$»:
6:»... E5
bra—k
mun—JO...
Imam—m
mm
xUmIU
.23.. .3332
20529.. ._...mm
Page 55-20
ALTERNATOR COMPONENT CHECKS
With alternator disassembled, the following components may
be tested.
Rotor Short-to-Ground Test
Set ohmmeter to x1000 scale.
Hold one test lead on rotor shaft (1) and other lead on either
slip ring (2). Note ohmmeter reading, then put test lead on
other slip ring.
In both cases, reading should be infinity (no needle movement).
if not, check soldered connections at slip ring and that excess
solder is not grounding rotor coil.
Replace rotor if damaged.
1. Rotor shaft
2. Slip ring
Rotor Open Test
Set ohmmeter to x1 scale.
Hold one test lead on one slip ring and other test lead on other
slip ring. Heading should be 3.0 to 3.7 ohms. If not, rotor is
open.
Replace rotor.
1. Slip rings
Stator Short to Ground Test
Remove stator leads (1) from rectifier board.
Set ohmmeter to x1000 scale.
Touch one test lead to stator core (2) bare metal and other
test lead to any stator lead.
Reading should be infinite (no needle movement). If any
needle movement is shown, stator is grounded.
Replace stator.
1. Stator lead
2. Stator core
Charging System
553.01
Page 55-21/22
Stator Continuity Test
Set ohmmeter to x1 scale.
Touch one test lead to any stator lead (1). Touch other test
lead to any other stator lead. Note reading. Repeat at all pairs
of test leads.
Equal readings should be obtained at each pair of stator leads.
A reading of infinity indicates poor connection at neutral junction.
Repair connection or replace stator.
1. Stator lead
Diode Test
Remove stator leads from rectifier board.
Set ohmmeter to x1 scale.
Touch one test lead to a diode junction ( 1). Touch other test
lead to heat sink (2). Note reading. Reverse test lead positions
and note reading. Repeat for remaining diodes.
One high and one low reading should be obtained for each
diode. lf proper readings are not obtained, replace diode plate.
1. Diode junction
2. Heat sink
Lighting Equipment
554.01
Page 55-23
HEADLIGHTS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove three screws (1 and 4) holding trim molding (5) to
body and remove molding.
Loosen three screws holding ring (2). Turn ring counter—
clockwise and remove ring.
Disconnect plug from headlight (3). Remove headlight.
Install in reverse order.
1.3crews
2,Ring
3. Headlight 4. Screws
5. Trim molding
ADJUSTMENT
All headlight adjustments should be made with the car unloaded at 16 ft. (5 m) from the screen. When using headlight
alignment equipment, refer to instructions provided.
Turn headlights on low beam.
Adjust horizontal alignment by turning screw (1).
1. Horizontal adjustment screw
Adjust vertical alignment by turning screw (1).
1. Vertical adjustment screw
HEADLIGHT MOTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove bolt [1) holding arm (2) to motor shaft.
Remove three bolts [3) and washers holding motor (5).
Disconnect electrical connector. Remove motor.
Install in reverse order.
1. Bolt
2. Arm
3. Bolts
4. Knob
5. Motor 6. Turnbuckle
FRONT PARKING/DIRECTIONAL/
HAZARD LIGHT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove twa screws holding lens and remove lens.
Remove two nuts and washers from studs (1). Remove light
assembly (2) from bracket (4).
Remove two screws (3) holding reflector in housing and pull
reflector out of housing.
1. Stud
2. Light assembly
3. Screw
4. Bracket
Disconnect electrical leads (1 and 3) from back of reflector (2).
Pull wires out of housing.
Install in reverse order.
1.’Electrical leads
2. Reflector
3. Electrical lead
Lighting Equipment
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove two screws (3) and remove lens (2).
Remove bulb [1) by twisting out.
Install in reverse order.
‘I. Bulb
2. Lens
3. Screws
TAIL LIGHT ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Working inside trunk. remove four nuts and washers from
studsm.
Pull tail light assembly (2) out of body and disconnect eight
electrical leads (3).
Install in reverse order.
1. Studs
2. Tail light assembly
3. Electrical leads
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove screws and lens (2) covering defective bulb (1).
Remove bulb by twisting out.
Install in reverse order.
1. Bulbs
2. Lens
3. Reflector
.
, 554.01
Page 55-25
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Working inside rear luggage compartment, disconnect electrical connectortl ).
Remove nut (21 holding ground wire (3)10 body.
Remove two screws (4) holding license plate light to body
and remove light
Install in reverse order.
1. Electrical connector
2. Nut 3. Wire 4. Screws
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove screw (2) holding lens (3) to housing (1).
Remove bulb {4} by twisting out.
Install in reverse order.
1. Housing
2. Screw 3. Lens 4. Bulb
Signaling
WIPER/DIRECTIONAL/LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Center steering wheel and front wheels.
Pry horn button off steering wheel (3).
Remove two horn button springs (4). Remove nut (1) holding
wheel (3) to shaft (2).
Mark steering wheel and steering shaft for installation refer—
ence. Pull wheel off shaft.
1. Nut
2. Steering shaft
3. Steering wheel
4. Horn button springs
Remove four screws [2 and 3) to remove upper and lower steering column covers (1 ).
1.8teering column covers
2.5crews
3. Screw
Loosen bolt (2) holding switch assembly (1) to shaft housing
(3). Slide switch assembly off steering column.
Disconnect electrical connectors and remove switch assembly.
Install in reverse order.
1.Switch
2.Bolt
3.5hafthousing
555.01
Page 55-27
Page 55-28
HORNS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
From front luggage compartment, remove headlight access
panel.
Working inside headlight compartment. disconnect electrical
connector from horn (3).
Remove bolt {1) holding horn bracket (2) to body and remove
horn (3} complete with bracket.
Repeat procedure on opposite side to remove remaining horn.
Install in reverse order.
1. Bolt
2. Bracket
3. Horn
\/
"’
Instrument Cluster
555.10
Page 55-29/30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable.
Working in front luggage compartment. remove four screws
and one bolt holding left grille and remove grille.
Uncouple speedometer cable (1) by sliding sleeve (4) on coupler
(3) toward front of vehicle.
Remove grommet (2) from firewall.
1. Cable
2. Grommet
3. Coupler
4. Sleeve
Remove five Allen bolts (1) holding instrument- cluster (2)
to support (3).
Pull instrument cluster out of panel far enough to gain access
to rear of cluster.
NOTE: it may be necessary to guide cable coupler through
firewall hole.
1. Allen bolts
2. lnstrument cluster
3. Support
Unplug three electrical connectors (1, 2 and 3) from instru—
ment cluster.
On vehicles with fuel injection. cut wire (4).
Remove instrument cluster.
To install. reverse removal procedure. On vehicles with fuel
injection, splice together wire cut during removal.
1. Connector
2. Connector
3. Connector
4. Wire
Accessories
555.15
Page 55-31
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
NOTE: Wipers should be in "park" position.
Disconnect wiper motor connector (7).
Remove two nuts (8) and both halves of retaining plate (10).
Push connector through hole in cowl.
Remove left wiper arm (1 1). Remove out (1 ), Spacer and rubber
washer from wiper arm shaft.
Remove nut (4) holding motor arm (9) to shaft and remove motor
arm.
Remove two bolts (6) and washers holding bracket (2).
Remove bolts (3) and washers holding wiper motor(5) to bracket.
Lift bracket until motor can be maneuvered out of vehicle.
Install in reverse order.
1. Nut
2. Bracket
3. Bolts
7. Electrical connector
1 1 .Wiper arm
4. Nut
8. Nuts
5. Wiper motor
9. Arm
6. Bolts
10. Retaining plate
WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT
With wiper arms in "park" position, check arm height at wiper
blade.
Check that dimension "A" is 2.4 to 3.3 in. (60 to 85 mm) and
dimension “8" is 2.6 to 3.3 in. (65 to 85 mm).
If necessary. remove wiper arms and reposition them to correct park position.
WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect hose (3) from motor (5) and plug opening to prevent leakage.
Disconnect electrical connector (4) from motor.
Remove nut (1) holding reservoir (2) and remove reservoir.
Install in reverse order.
1. Nut
2. Reservoir
3. Hose
4. Connector
5. Motor
Page 55—32
HEATED REAR WINDOW
REPAIR
When repairing an open metallic conductor attached to rear
window, it is not necessary to remove glass.
The repair can be accomplished with a special kit made for
this purpose or a silver paint with metallic content.
Clean area around break‘
Mix paintthoroughly.
Mask off each side of the break. Carefully apply paint to break
with a camel hair brush as shown.
Allow to dry for about 4 to 5 hours. A source of low tempera;
ture heat (hair dryer, infrared lamp) will shorten drying time.
CAUTION: Do not turn on rear window heater until repair is
completely dry.
X1/9 1979
1979 -- 1982
1982
X1/9
SERVICE
SERVICE MANUAL
MANUAL
GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
TUNE UP
UP
TUNE
00
00
ENGINE
ENGINE
10
10
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
18
18
TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION
DIFFERENTIAL
DIFFERENTIAL
AXLE
AXLE
21/27
21/27
BRAKES
BRAKES
33
33
STEERING SYSTEM
SYSTEM
STEERING
41
41
SUSPENSION AND
AND WHEELS
WHEELS
SUSPENSION
44
44
ACCESSORIES
ACCESSORIES
50
50
ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL
55
55
BODY
70
BODY - 70
PARTS CATALOG.
SERVICE MANUAL &
SERVICE TIME
SCHEDULE CODE
70
701.01
General Information ..................................
Engine Compartment Lid .............................
701.02
Instrument Panel .....................................
701.11/.17
Internal and External Bodywork .......................
701.25
Hard Top ............................................
701 .27/.30/.31 Doors-Door Glass-Lock Mechanism ...................
701.54
Rear Window ........................................
701.60
Luggage Compartment Lids ...........................
703.06/.07
Front and Rear Bumpers ............................
706 .01
Seats ................................................
Page
70-1
70-3
70-5
70-7
70-1 1
70-13
70-19
70-21
70-25
70-27
70
Body
Page 70-1 /2
GENERAL INFORMATION
Two-door unitized body.
Instruments and switches on driver's side. Heat and air con-
Front doors hinged at front. Side window with two safety glass
panes, i.e. fixed quarter window and drop window controlled
by regulator.
lets. one at each end and two in center panel.
Doors have outside key handles and inside locking devices.
Outer door handles have Spring-loaded releaSe grips.
Rear window is fixed safety glass.
Luggage compartments in front and rear. Front compartment
unlatched by latch in driver‘s footwell. Rear compartment key
lock located in left door column. Tool kit and jack located in
rear compartment.
Seats are adjustable bucket-type with tiltable back for access
to rear of seats.
Spare wheel housed behind passenger‘s seat.
trols are in center of instrument panel. Four adjustable out—
Rear view mirrors inside and outside.
Sun visors are padded and adjustable.
Carpeting in passenger compartment. Rubber mats in luggage
compartment.
Engine compartment lid has key lock located in driver‘s door
column.
Air Iouvers in both sides for letting air into engine compart—
ment.
Ignition key lock with anti—theft device.
Removable hard top.
Front and rear energy absorbing bumpers made of aluminum.
Engine Compartment Lid
701.01
Page 70-3
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LID
REMOVAL INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Unhook prop (2) from bushing (1).
CAUTION: Prop is under high spring tension.
Remove four nuts (4) and washers holding lid (3) to hinges
{5). Remove lid.
When installing lid. check position. Shift lid on hinges to obtain proper alignment.
Tighten bolt holding lid to hinges.
l. Bushing
2. Prep
3. Lid
4. Nuts
5, Hinge
1 . Cover
8. Cover
15. Screw
23. Cable
2. Plastic clip
-9. Bolt
16. Access panel
24. Gasket
3. Pin
4. Air duct
“Hal '"iem‘?" WY)
5- Striker
5- Screw
7- Washer
10_Lockwasher
11.Washer
12, Lid
13. Pad
14, Support
(fuel injection only)
17. Bolt
18. Grille
25. Duct
26. Air intake
19. Screw
27. Bolt
21 . Plate
29. Clip
20. Washer
22. Latch
28. Bracket
31. Plate
32. Hinge
33. Bolt
34. Bracket
35. Prop
36. Bushing
30. Lock assembly
EXPLODED VIEW OF ENGINE COMPARTMENT LID COMPONENTS AND AIR DUCTS
ENGINE COMPARTMENT LID LATCH
REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Disconnect cable (3) from latch (1).
Remove two bolts (2) and washers holding latch to body. Remove latch.
When installing. position latch for proper operation.
Tighten two bolts and reconnect cable.
1. Latch
2. Bolts
3. Cable
Instrument Panel
701.02
Page 70-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect battery ground cable. Remove radio.
Remove instrument cluster. Refer to 555.10.
Remove heater or air conditioning control panel fascia panel.
Remove and disconnect clock. or remove clock opening cover
plate.
Remove screw (3) holding control panel (2) to support (6).
Remove four Screws (4 and 5) holding support to instrument
panel (1).
Maneuver support out of instrument panel.
1. Instrument panel
5. Screw
2. Control panel
3. Screw
4. Screws
6. Support
Disconnect electrical connectors from light switch (2) and
cigarette lighter.
Remove two screws holding glove box liner and remove liner.
Lower luse/ relay panel.
Working through openings and under instrument panel, remove
seven bolts [1 and 3) holding instrument panel to cowl.
Carefully remove instrument panel from vehicle.
Install in reverse order.
1. Bolts
2. Light switch
3. Bolt
Page 70-6
1 .Spring
2. Pad
3. Bracket
4. Bolt
9. Clip
10. Instrument panel
1 1 . Glove box liner
12. Screw
'l 7. Support
18. Clip
19. Bracket
13. Glove box door
14. Latch
7. Bracket
20. Upper steering column cover
21 . Lower steering column cover
22. Screw
15. Clock opening cover
8. Bushing
23. Instrument cluster support
15. Radio opening cover
5. Lockwasher
6. Washer
EXPLODED VIEW OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
701.11/.17
Internal and Exterlnal Bodywork
FRONT LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
TOP VIEW
ENGINE'COMPARTMENT
515/16"
Q
(151)
\
Page 70—7/8
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
as
DRIVER'S SIDE
\
PINCHWELD
377/8‘
497/3"
(1 267)
\.
/V\
43%"
(1 1 1 1)
eon/(6'7
(1545)
36‘5/15"
(938)
16%"
(422)
501/2”
(1283)
28‘/a"
(714)
44%4"
(1137)(
(813)
127/11"
(327)
359/115"
(903 )
701/8”
(1781)
521/4"
(1327)
(902)
MEASUREMENTS
All measurements are given in inches and millimeters.
Measurement Points
SIDE VIEW
Bolts, nuts and plugs are measured from the center of the
unit and are shown on the illustration as a solid dot-+—
Holes are measured from the closest edge to the other point
of the measurement. Holes are shown as outlines only. It
The symbol Q next to a hole indicates that the measure—
ment is taken from the center of that hole.
Top and Bottom View Measurements
Datum Measurements
Datum measurements provide a fixed reference point for all
vertical measurements. Measurements along the datum line
are not point-to»point. The measurements must always be
made parallel to the datum line.
63/3"
(162)
8%"
(210)
17"
(432)
73/8"
(187)
15"
4%"
(121)
(292)
(3 2)
(495)
Dimensions provided courtesy of KLM Inc. for the exclusive
use of Fiat Motors of North America.
@1981 KLM AUTOMOTIVE PUBLISHING INC.
14 1n
41/16"
(103)
19/2"
\\\«~ (381)
~11w"
w.
All dimensions are point-to—point, closest distance between
the points of measurement.
UNDERBODY DIMENSIONS
375/16" :3
7\
215/16"
(541)
/
PINCHWELD
351/2"
J
O
16‘i’
(419
(962
/
24"
(610)
I
371/2”
(953)
121/2"
(318)
21va"
(540)
(948)
o
HVEH
FRONT
6013/18"
(1 545)
Internal and External Bodywork
1. Crossrail
701.11/.17
Page 70-9
2. Wall
5. Joining element
6. Cover
9. Battery seat
10. Framing
3. Nut
4. Lockwasher
7. Bracket
8. Framing
11. Side panel
1. Air intake wall
2. Air intake case
3. Reiniorcement
4. Framing
5. Windshield framing
6. Joining element
7. Framing
B. Joining element
9. Reinforcement
10. Framing
BODY SHELL INNER COMPONENTS
12. Wall
11. Reinforcement
12, Reinforcement
13. Reinforcement
14. Framing
15. Joining element
1. Boxed panel
2. Wall
4. Side panel
5. Wall
3. Joining element
6. Joining element
7. Side panel
8. Wheel well
9. Reinforcement
10. Side panel
BODY SHELL INNER COMPONENTS
19
1. Panel
2. Panel
3. Panel
4. Channel
5. Hood channel
6. Panel
7. Windshield panel
8. Panel
9. Panel
10. Panel
11. Panel
12. Panel
16. Panel
17, Panel
13. Panel
18. Seal
14. Panel
15. Hood channel
19. Joining element
20. Joining element
BODY SHELL OUTER COMPONENTS
1B
21. Panel
22. Door opening panel
23. Panel
Hard Top
701.25
Page 70-11/12
ADJUSTMENT
Adjust hard top for proper alignment by loosening four screws
[1] holding striker plate (2).
Shift plate as necessary for proper adjustment.
1. Screws
2. Striker plate
1. Hard top
8. Weatherstrip
14. Support
2. Lug
9. Molding
15. Molding
3. Striker plate
10, Weatherstrip
16. Weatherstrip
4. Cover
11. Coupling
17. Weatherstrip
5. End plate
6. Channel
12. Latch
13. Striker plate
18. Channel
19. Weatherstrip
7. Weatherstrip
EXPLODED VIEW OF HARD TOP COMPONENTS
Doors-Door Glass-Lock Mechanism
701
.27/.3G/.31
Page 70-13
DOOR PANEL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Pry out plug [1) in top of arm rest (2).
Remove three screws holding arm rest to door and remove
arm rest.
Unscrew lock button (3).
Pry back cover (6) and remove clip on window crank. Remove
window crank (7).
Remove door handle trim ring (5) by pushing toward rear of
vehicle and pulling out.
Carefully pry door panel (4) off door.
Install in reverse order.
1. Plug
6. Cover
2. Arm rest
3. Lock button
4. Door panel
5, Trim ring
7. Window crank
((1%n
27 26 25
1 . Latch rod
8. Tie rod
efi
15. Latch
2. Clip
3. Nut
4. Washer
9. Handle assembly
10. Lock cylinder
1 1 . Spring
16. Washer
17. $crew
18. Screw
5. Bracket
6. Lock button
‘1'. Lock rod
12. Pin
13. Pawl
14. Screw
19. Lockwasher
20. Outer skin
21.000r
EXPLODED VIEW OF DOOR
22. Door panel
26 Lockwasher
28. Bolt
29. Hinge
30. Hinge pin
31. Trim rlng
32. Door handle
33. Clip
Page 70-14
DOOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove door panel.
Remove electrical leads (5) by removing clip (1) and, on vehicles
with power windows. disconnecting leads from motor.
Pull electrical leads out through hole in door.
Disconnect door check (4) by squeezing rods together.
Scribe marks for hinge location.
Remove six screws [2 and 7) holding hinges (3 and 6) to door
jamb and remove door.
Install in reverse order.
1. Clip 2. Screws 3. Hinge
6. Hinge 7. Screws
4. Door check
5. Electrical leads
DOOR LATCH
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove door panel.
Disconnect lock rod (2) from plastic clip (3) and remove rod.
Disconnect adjustable head (1) from handle assembly.
1. Adjustable head
2, Lock rod
3. Clip
Remove three screws (1 and 3) holding latch (2) to door.
Tilt latch until latch rod (4) can be disconnected from latch.
Maneuver latch out of door.
install in reverse order. Adjust door handle.
1. Screw
2. Latch
3. Screw 4, Latch rod
_
Doors-Door Glass-Lock Mechanism
HANDLE AND LOCK CYIJNDER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect adjustable head (2) from handle assembly (3),
Remove three nuts (1) holding handle assembly to door and
remove handle assembly.
Install in reverse order. Adjust handle.
1. Nuts
2. Adjustable head
3. Handle assembly
ADJUSTMENT
Disconnect adjustable head (2) from handle assembly (1 ).
Turn head on tie rod (3) until proper length is obtained.
1. Handle assembly 2. Adjustable head 3. Tie rod
STRIKER PLATE
ADJUSTMENT
Loosen two screws (1) and shift plate (2) as necessary.
1. Screws
2. Striker plate
701
.27/.3a/.31
Page 70-15
1. Doorsill molding
2. Weatherstrip
3_ Bolt
4. Washer
5. Boot
6. Channel
1'. Glass
3. Weatherstrip
9. Pillar
10. Pad
11. Weatherstrip
12. Clip
13. Plate
14. Screw
15. Pad
16. Glass
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
G uide
Plate
Screw
Weatherstrip
Cover
Boot
Weatherstrip
Channel
25.
26.
27,
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Washer
Lockwasher
Bolt
Weatherstrip
Pad
N ut
Washer
Pulley
EXPLODED VIEW OF WINDOW ASSEMBLY
WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove door panel. Lower window.
Loosen nut [31 on adjustable pulley and relieve tension on
control cable (1).
Unhook control cable from five pulleys (2).
1. Control cable
2. Pulley
3. Nut
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
Washer
Bolt
Lockwasher
N u!
Cover
Handle
Window regulator
_
Doors-Door Glass-Lock Mechanism
Pull window up part way and remove two screws (2) and plate
[31 holding control cable (1) to right side of window (4).
Repeat above procedure to remove cable from left side of
window.
Lower window.
1. Control cable
2. Screws
3. Plate
4. Window
Remove three nuts (1 and 3) and washers holding regulator
(2) to door. Remove regulator from door complete with control
cable.
Install in reverse order. Adjust regulator.
1. Nuts 2. Regulator 3. Nut
ADJUSTMENT
Loosen four screws (1) through two plates holding control
cable (2) at left and right side of window.
Lower window to full down position.
Set regulator handle in “wide open" position.
Tighten screws securely.
After adjustment, glass must run full length of its travel. Control cable must wind and unwind properly on regulator pulley.
‘l. Screws
2. Control cable
701
.27/.30/.31
Page 70-17
Page 70-18
To adjust tension of control cable (1), loosen nut (2) on adjustable pulley.
Move pulley in slot (3) to set tension. Tighten nut.
1. Control cable
2. Nut
3. Slot
Rear Window
701.54
Page 70-1 9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove engine compartment lid. Refer to 701.01.
Remove gas cap (1).
Remove four screws (3 and 4) and washers holding two covers
(2 and 5) to body and remove covers.
1. Gas cap
2. Cover
3. Screws
4. Screws
5. Cover
Disconnect one rear window heater wire from each side of
window.
Remove four bolts (3) and washers holding prop (2) to body
and remove prop.
Remove four nuts and washers holding hinges (1 and 4) to
body and remove hinges.
Remove six bolts (6 and 7) and washers holding weatherstrip (5) to body and remove weatherstrip.
1. Hinge
6. Bolt
2. Prop
3. Bolts
4. Hinge
5. Weatherstrip
7. Bolt
Pull iubber seal .(2) around window towards center of window
(1).
Slide seal out from under window at edge.
Pull window down. Remove top rubber seal. Remove window.
To install, place rubber seal on top of window.
Place window in frame (3) and push it up into place.
Slide rubber seal (2) under window. Make sure window is in
center of seal and seal overlaps frame.
Reverse removal procedure to complete installation.
1. Rear window
2. Rubber seal
3. Frame
Page 70-20
1. Frame
2. Rubber seal
3. Weatherstrip
4. Bolt
5‘ Lockwasher
6. Washer
7‘ Window
EXPLODED VIEW OF REAR WINDOW COMPONENTS
701.60
Luggage Compartment Lids
Page 70—21
FRONT LUGGAGE LID
REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Remove four bolts (1) and washers holding lid (3) to hinges (2).
Remove nut (5) and washers holding support rod (4) to lid.
Remove lid.
When installing lid, tighten hinge bolts enough to permit lid
to be shifted.
Close lid and check for preper alignment. Shift lid as necessary. After lid is positioned properly, tighten bolts.
Install support rod.
1. Bolts
2. Hinge
3. Luggage lid
4. Support rod
5. Nut
29 28 27
1. Spring washer
2. Rod
8. Washer
9. Washer
15. Washer
16. Handle assembly
22. Lockwasher
23, Nut
29. Washer
30_ Washer
4. Lockwasher
10. Bolt
1 1. Nut
17. Bracket
18. Cable
24. Bolt
25. Lockwasher
31. Bolt
32. Hinge
5. Nut
6. Bolt
12. Washer
13. Nut
19. Rubber seal
20. Latch
26. Washer
27. Nut
34. Hinge
7. Bracket
14. Washer
21 . Washer
28. Lockwasher
35. Lid
3. Washer
EXPLODED VIEW OF FRONT LUGGAGE LID COMPONENTS
33. Nut
Page 70-22
FRONT LUGGAGE LID LATCH
REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
To provide slack in cable for latch removal, remove two cap
nuts (ll and washers holding handle assembly (2) to body.
Separate handle assembly from body.
1. Cap nuts
2. Handle assembly
Remove four screws [1) and bolt holding grille (2) on right
side of vehicle.
Remove two bolts (3 and 5] and washers holding latch (4) to
cowl.
Maneuver latch out through grille opening.
‘I. Screws
2. Grille
3. Bolt
4. Latch
5. Bolt
Loosen bolt (2) attaching cable (4) to latch (3) and disconnect
cable.
Remove two bolts holding latch to bracket (1) and remove
latch.
When installing, tighten bolts enough to allow lock to be shifted.
Check lock operation and shift lock as needed. Tighten two
bolts.
Reverse removal procedure to complete installation.
1. Bracket
2. Bolt
3. Latch
4. Cable
Luggage Compartment Lids
HEAR LUGGAGE LID
REMOVAL. INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Remove four bolts (1 and 6) holding lid (5) to hinges (2 and 7).
Unhook prep (3) from bracket (4) and remove lid.
Remove prop. cotter pin, washers and bushing.
When installing lid. check position. Shift lid on hinges to obtain proper alignment. Tighten bolts holding lid to hinges.
1. Bolts
2. Hinge
3. Prop
1. Striker plate
2.14:1
4. Bracket
5. Lid
6. Bolts
7. Bolt
8. Lockwasher
3. Hinge
9. Washer
4. Washer
'1. Hinge
13. Washer
14. Bolt
15. Cable
19. Screw
20. Lockwasher
21. Screw
25. Fork
26. Screw
27. Washer
16. Rubber ring
22. Lock cylinder
28. Weatherstrip
5. Lockwasher
10. Latch
11. Spring
17. Washer
23. Lock assembly
29. Bushing
6. Bolt
12. Lockwasher
18. Lockwasher
24. Washer
30. Prop
31. Pin
EXPLODED VIEW OF REAR LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LID COMPONENTS
Page 70-24
HEAR LUGGAGE LID LATCH
REMOVAL, INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT
Remove two bolts (2) and four washers holding latch (1) to
body.
Disconnect cable {4) from latch. Disconnect emergency cable
[Bl from latch. Remove latch.
When installing latch, position it for proper operation.
Tighten two bolts.
NOTE: Release pull for emergency cable is in engine com—
partment.
1. Latch
2. Bolts
3. Emergency cable
4. Cable
REAR COMPARTMENT LOCK ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect cables from engine compartment lid latch and
rear luggage lid latch.
Disconnect cables (2) from levers l1 and 3).
Remove screw [5) holding lock assembly (4) in door frame.
Remove lock assembly.
Install in reverse order.
1. Lever
2. Cable
3. Lever
4. Lock assembly
5. Screw
Front and Rear Bumpers
FRONT BUMPER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove four nuts (3) and washers holding parking/hazard
lights (5) to brackets (4).
Separate lights from brackets.
Remove four bolts (1) and washers holding front bumper to
shock absorbers (2). Remove bumper.
Install in reverse order.
1. Bolt
2. Shock absorber
3. Nut
4. Bracket
5. Light assembly
REAR BUMPER
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Remove four bolts (3) and washers holding bumper (2) to
shock absorbers (1). Remove bumper.
Install in reverse order.
1. Shock absorber
2. Bumper
3. Bolts
703.06/.07
Page 70-25/26
Seats
706.01
Page 70-27f28
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Disconnect spring (1) from bracket (2) under seat (4).
Flaise lever. Slide seat off floor tracks (3).
Install in reverse order.
1. Spring
2. Bracket
3. Track
4. Seat
~.._.‘I
L/